THE BMW X5 WITH eDRIVE

Owner's Manualfor Vehicle

The UltimateDriving Machine®

THE BMW X5 WITH eDRIVE.OWNER'S MANUAL.

ContentsA-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 966 021 - X/15

X5 eDrive Owner's Manual for the vehicleThank you for choosing a BMW.The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better controlyou will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐tains important information on vehicle operation that will helpyou make full use of the technical features available in yourBMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute tomaintaining the value of your BMW.Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found inthe appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐chures in the onboard literature.We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.Additional information on the Internet:www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide


© 2015 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyReprinting, including excerpts, only with the writtenconsent of BMW AG, Munich.US English X/15, 11 15 490Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleachedwithout chlorine, suitable for recycling.


ContentsThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic or item is by using the index, refer topage 268.

6 Information

At a glance14 Cockpit18 iDrive27 Voice activation system30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle32 BMW eDRIVE35 Safety of the high-voltage system

Controls38 Opening and closing56 Adjusting67 Transporting children safely72 Driving90 Displays110 Lights115 Safety144 Driving stability control systems151 Driving comfort173 Climate control180 Interior equipment188 Storage compartments

Driving tips196 Things to remember when driving201 Loading204 Saving fuel

Mobility210 Charging vehicle218 Refueling221 Fuel223 Wheels and tires234 Engine compartment237 Engine oil241 Coolant243 Maintenance245 Replacing components251 Breakdown assistance257 Care

Reference264 Technical data266 Appendix268 Everything from A to Z


InformationUsing this Owner's ManualOrientationThe fastest way to find information on a partic‐ular topic is by using the index.An initial overview of the vehicle is provided inthe first chapter.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineUpdates made after the editorial deadline canlead to differences between the printed Own‐er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐uals:▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.▷ Online Owner's Manual.▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.Information to updates made after the editorialdeadline can be found in the appendix of theprinted Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Owner's Manual for Navigation,Entertainment, CommunicationOwner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,and Communication can be obtained asprinted book from the service center.The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, andCommunication can also be called up via thefollowing media:▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control

Display.▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.

Additional sources ofinformationA dealer’s service center will be glad to answeradditional questions at any time.

InternetInformation on BMW, for example, on technol‐ogy, is available on the Internet:www.bmwusa.com.

BMW Driver’s Guide AppThe Owner's Manual is availablein many countries as an app. Ad‐ditional information on the Inter‐net:www.bmw.com/

bmw_drivers_guide

Symbols and displaysSymbols in the Owner's Manual

Indicates precautions that must be followedprecisely in order to avoid the possibility ofpersonal injury and serious damage to thevehicle.◄ Marks the end of a specific item ofinformation.

Refers to measures that can be taken tohelp protect the environment."..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used toselect individual functions.›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voiceactivation system.››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by thevoice activation system.

Action stepsAction steps to be carried out are presented asnumbered list. The steps must be carried outin the defined order.

1. First action step.2. Second action step.

Seite 6

Information

6Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 966 021 - X/15

EnumerationsEnumerations without mandatory order or al‐ternative possibilities are presented as list withbullet points.▷ First possibility.▷ Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual forinformation on a particular part or assembly.

Indicates, on certain parts or assemblies, thatincorrect use of high-voltage equipment or oforange-colored high-voltage components re‐sults in the risk of life-threatening injury fromelectric shock.

Vehicle features and optionsThis Owner's Manual describes all models andall standard, country-specific and optionalequipment that is offered in the model series.Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐able in your vehicle, for example, because ofthe selected optional features or the country-specific version.This also applies to safety-related functionsand systems.The respectively applicable country provisionsmust be observed when using the respectivefeatures and systems.

For any options and equipment not describedin this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐mentary Owner's Manuals.On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐ments are arranged differently from what isshown in the illustrations.

Status of the Owner'sManualBasic informationThe manufacturer of your vehicle pursues apolicy of constant development that is con‐ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue toembody the highest quality and safety stan‐dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ fromthose in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorialdeadlineUpdates made after the editorial deadline canlead to differences between the printed Own‐er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐uals:▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.▷ Online Owner's Manual.▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.Information to updates made after the editorialdeadline can be found in the appendix of theprinted Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Own safetyWarrantyYour vehicle is technically configured for theoperating conditions and registration require‐ments applying in the country of first deliveryalso known as homologation. If your vehicle isto be operated in a different country it might benecessary to adapt your vehicle to potentiallydiffering operating conditions and permit re‐

Seite 7

Information


quirements. If your vehicle does not complywith the homologation requirements in a cer‐tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐formation on warranty is available from adealer’s service center.

Maintenance and repairsAdvanced technology, e.g., the use of modernmaterials and high-performance electronics,requires suitable maintenance and repair work.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you entrust corresponding procedures toa BMW dealer’s service center. If you chooseto use another service facility, BMW recom‐mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.maintenance and repair, according to BMWspecifications with properly trained personnel,referred to in this Owner's Manual as "anotherqualified service center or repair shop".If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequentdamage and related safety risks.

Parts and accessoriesBMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐cessory products approved by BMW.Approved parts and accessories, and adviceon their use and installation are available froma BMW dealer's service center.BMW parts and accessories were tested byBMW for their safety and suitability in BMWvehicles.BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐sories.BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐ual product from another manufacturer can beused with BMW vehicles without presenting asafety hazard, even if a country-specific officialapproval was issued. BMW does not evaluatewhether these products are suitable for BMWvehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 WarningCalifornia laws require us to state the followingwarning:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐bile components and parts, including compo‐nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐cle, contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain or emitchemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing thoroughly with soap andwater.

Service and warrantyWe recommend that you read this publicationthoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐lowing warranties:▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐

ranty.▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐

ited Warranty.Detailed information about these warranties islisted in the Service and Warranty InformationBooklet for US models or in the Warranty andService Guide Booklet for Canadian models.Your vehicle has been specifically adapted anddesigned to meet the particular operating con‐ditions and homologation requirements in yourcountry and continental region in order to de‐liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicleis operated under those conditions. If you wishto operate your vehicle in another country orregion, you may be required to adapt your ve‐

Seite 8

Information


hicle to meet different prevailing operatingconditions and homologation requirements.You should also be aware of any applicablewarranty limitations or exclusions for suchcountry or region. In such case, please contactCustomer Relations for further information.

MaintenanceMaintain the vehicle regularly to sustain theroad safety, operational reliability and the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ures:▷ BMW Maintenance system▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian modelsIf the vehicle is not maintained according tothese specifications, this could result in seri‐ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage isnot covered by the BMW New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

Data memoryMany electronic components on your vehicleare equipped with data memories that tempo‐rarily or permanently store technical informa‐tion about the condition of the vehicle, eventsand faults. This technical information generallyrecords the state of a component, a module, asystem or the environment:▷ Operating mode of system components, fill

levels for instance.▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from

its individual components, for example,wheel rotation speed/vehicle speed, decel‐eration, transverse acceleration.

▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐tem components, for example, lights andbrakes.

▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ing the stability control system.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.This data is purely technical in nature and isused to detect and correct faults and to opti‐mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles overroutes traveled cannot be created from thisdata. When service offerings are used, for ex‐ample, repair services, service processes, war‐ranty claims, quality assurance, this technicalinformation can be read out from the event andfault memories by employees of the dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,using special diagnostic tools. You can obtainfurther information there if you need it. After anerror is corrected, the information in the faultmemory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐ous basis.With the vehicle in use there are situationswhere you can associate these technical datawith individuals if combined with other infor‐mation, for example, an accident report, dam‐age to the vehicle, eye witness accounts —possibly with the assistance of an expert.Additional functions that are contractuallyagreed with the customer - such as vehicleemergency locating - you can transmit certainvehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDRThis vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐tions, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for ashort period of time, typically 30 seconds orless.

Seite 9

Information


The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under‐standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if anontrivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data, e. g., name,gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ment, could combine the EDR data with thetype of personally identifying data routinely ac‐quired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi‐cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identificationnumber

The vehicle identification number can be foundin the engine compartment.

The vehicle identification number can also befound behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defectsFor US customersThe following only applies to vehicles ownedand operated in the US.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause in‐jury or death, you should immediately informthe National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW ofNorth America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone1-800-831-1117.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer,or BMW of North America, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐formation about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customersCanadian customers who wish to report asafety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐fect Investigations and Recalls, may call thetoll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can alsoobtain other information about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Seite 10

Information


Seite 11

Information



At a glanceThese overviews of buttons, switches and

displays are intended to familiarize you with yourvehicle. You will also become quickly acquaintedwith the available control concepts and options.


CockpitVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

the selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch 532 Power windows 513 Exterior mirror operation 644 Opening and closing top tail‐

gate 45

5 Unlocking central locking sys‐tem 44

Locking central locking sys‐tem 44

6 Lights

Front fog lights 113

Lights offDaytime running lights 112Parking lights 110

Low beams 110

Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit


Automatic headlight con‐trol 111Adaptive Light Control 112High-beam Assistant 113Instrument lighting 114

Night Vision, switch on/switch offheat image 134

7 Steering column stalk, leftTurn signal 82

High beams, head‐light flasher 82

High-beam Assistant 113

Roadside parking lights 111

Onboard computer 103

8 Steering wheel buttons, leftStore speed 157, 151

Resume speed 157, 151

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ing 151

Cruise control on/off, inter‐rupt 157

Cruise control, reduce dis‐tance 151

Cruise control, increase dis‐tance 151

Cruise control rocker switch 157, 151

9 Shift paddles 88

10 Instrument cluster 9011 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source

Volume

Voice activation 27

Telephone, see Owner's Manualfor Navigation, Entertainment andCommunication

Thumbwheel for selection lists 103

12 Steering column stalk, rightWiper 82

Rain sensor 83

Clean the windshields and head‐lights 82

Rear window wiper in Canadianmodels 84

Rear window wiper 84

Cleaning rear window 84

13 Start/stop the engine, switchdriving readiness and the ignitionon/off 72

14 Horn, total area15 Steering wheel heating 66

16 Adjust steering wheel 66

17 Unlock hood 234

Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance


18 Tank vent 218

All around the center console

1 Control Display 182 Glove compartment 1883 Ventilation 1764 Hazard warning system 251

Intelligent Safety button 124

5 Automatic climate control 1736 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐nication

7 Controller with buttons 198 Parking brake 78

9 Automatic Hold 79

10 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol 144

Driving Dynamics Control 148

PDC Park Distance Control 160Rearview camera 162Top View 165Parking assistant 169Side View 167

Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit


HDC Hill Descent Control 146

eDRIVE 75

11 Transmission selector lever 86

All around the roofliner

1 Intelligent emergency call 251

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 53

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐senger airbag 117

4 Reading lights 114

5 Interior lights 114

6 Glasses compartment 190

Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance


iDriveVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

The conceptThe iDrive combines the functions of manyswitches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ated from a central location.

WARNINGOperating the integrated information

system and communication devices while driv‐ing can distract from traffic. It is possible tolose control of the vehicle. There is risk of anaccident. Only use the systems or deviceswhen the traffic situation allows. If necessarystop and use the systems and devices whilethe vehicle is stationary.◀

Overview of control elementsControl elements

1 Control Display2 Controller with buttons and, depending on

the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Information▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the

care instructions.▷ Do not place objects close to the Control

Display; otherwise, the Control Display canbe damaged.

▷ In the case of very high temperatures onthe Control Display, for example due to in‐tense solar radiation, the brightness maybe reduced down to complete deactiva‐tion. Once the temperature is reduced, forexample through shadow or climate controlsystem, the normal functions are re-estab‐lished.

Switching on1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press the Controller.

Switching off

1. Press button.

Seite 18

At a glance iDrive


2. "Turn off control display"

Controller with navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to selectmenu items and enter the settings.Some iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the Controller.1. Turn.

2. Press.

3. Move in four directions.

Buttons on Controller

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous display.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation systemThe buttons can be used to open the menusdirectly. The Controller can be used to selectmenu items and enter the settings.1. Turn.

Seite 19

iDrive At a glance


2. Press.

3. Move in two directions.

Buttons on Controller

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

AUDIO Open audio menu last listenedto, switch between audio me‐nus.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating conceptOpening the main menu

Press button.

The main menu is displayed.All iDrive functions can be called up via themain menu.

Selecting menu itemsHighlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menuitem is highlighted.

2. Press the Controller.

Menu items in the Owner's ManualIn the Owner's Manual, menu items that can beselected are set in quotation marks, for exam‐ple, "Settings".

Changing between panelsAfter a menu item is selected, for example,"Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels canoverlap.▷ Move the Controller to the left.

Closes current display and shows previousdisplay.Reopens previous display by pressingBACK button. In this case, the currentpanel is not closed.

Seite 20

At a glance iDrive


▷ Move the Controller to the right.Opens new display on top of previousscreen.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐cate that additional panels can be opened.

Opening the Options menuPress button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Additional options: move the Controller to theright repeatedly until the "Options" menu isdisplayed.

Options menuThe "Options" menu consists of various areas:▷ Screen settings, for example, "Split

screen".▷ Control options for the selected main

menu, for example, for "Radio".▷ If applicable, further operating options for

the selected menu, for example, "Storestation".

Changing settings1. Select a field.2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐

ting is displayed.


Activating/deactivating the functionsSeveral menu items are preceded by a check‐box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu itemactivates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated. Function is deactivated.

TouchpadSome iDrive functions can be operated usingthe touchpad on the Controller.

Selecting functions1. "Settings"2. "Touchpad"3. Select the desired function.

▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐

tive map.▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered

letters and numbers.

Seite 21

iDrive At a glance


Entering letters and numbersEntering letters requires some practice at thebeginning. When entering, pay attention to thefollowing:▷ The system distinguishes between upper

and lower-case letters and numbers. Forentry, it may be necessary to change be‐tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐bers and characters, refer to page 25.

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed onthe Control Display.

▷ Always enter associated characters, suchas accents or periods so that the letter canbe clearly recognized. Possible input de‐pends on the set language. Where neces‐sary, enter special characters via the Con‐troller.

▷ To delete a character, slide to the left onthe touchpad.

▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right inthe center of the touchpad.

▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in theupper area of the touchpad.

▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the rightin the lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and InternetVia touch-pad move the interactive map in thenavigation system and Internet sites.

Function Controls

Move interactive map orInternet sites.

Swipe into re‐spective direc‐tion.

Enlarge/shrink interactivemap or Internet sites.

Drag in or out onthe touchpad withfingers.

Display the menu or opena link in the Internet.

Tap once.

Changing settingsYou may change Control Display settings, forexample the volume, via touchpad. Swipe leftor right accordingly.

Example: setting the clockSetting the clockOn the Control Display:

1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐played.

2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐lighted, and then press the Controller.

3. If necessary, move the Controller to the leftto display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" ishighlighted, and then press the Controller.

Seite 22

At a glance iDrive


5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐lighted, and then press the Controller.

6. Turn the Controller to set the hours andpress the Controller.

7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes andpress the Controller.

Status informationStatus fieldThe following information is displayed in thestatus field at the top right:▷ Time.▷ Current entertainment source.▷ Sound output, on/off.▷ Wireless network reception strength.▷ Phone status.▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbolsThe symbols are grouped as follows:

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Wireless network receptionstrength.Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received.

Check the SIM card.

SIM card is blocked.

SIM card is missing.

Enter PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player.

Music collection.

Gracenote® database.

AUX-IN port in the front or in therear.

USB audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are turned off.

Check the current vehicle position.

Seite 23

iDrive At a glance


Split screenGeneral informationAdditional information can be displayed on theright side of the split screen, for example, infor‐mation from the onboard computer.In the divided screen view, the so-called splitscreen, this information remains visible evenwhen you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and offOn the Control Display:

1. Press button.2. "Split screen"

Selecting the displayOn the Control Display:

1. Press button.2. "Split screen"3. Move the Controller until the split screen is

selected.4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen

content".5. Select the desired menu item.

Programmable memorybuttonsGeneral informationThe iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly, for example, radio stations, navigationdestinations, phone numbers and menu en‐tries.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Saving a function1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. Press and hold the desired button,until a signal sounds.

Running a functionPress button.The function will work immediately.

This means, for example, that the number is di‐aled when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignmentTouch buttons with bare fingers. Do not weargloves or use objects.The key assignment is displayed at top edge ofscreen.

Deleting the button assignments1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for

approx. 5 seconds.

Seite 24

At a glance iDrive


2. "OK"

Deleting personal in thevehicleThe conceptDepending on the usage, the vehicle savespersonal data, such as stored radio stations.These personal data can be permanently de‐leted through iDrive.

General informationDepending on the equipment package, the fol‐lowing data can be deleted:▷ Personal Profile settings.▷ Stored radio stations.▷ Stored Favorites buttons.▷ Travel and onboard computer information.▷ Music collection.▷ Navigation, for example stored destina‐

tions.▷ Phone book.▷ Online data, for example Favorites, cook‐

ies.▷ Voice notes.▷ Login accounts.▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.Altogether, the deletion of the data can take upto 30 minutes.

Functional requirementData can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting dataHeed and follow the instructions on the Con‐trol Display.

1. Switch on the ignition.2. "Settings"3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete personal data"5. "Continue"6. "OK"

Entering letters and numbersGeneral informationOn the Control Display:

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐bers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers ifneeded.

3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

Press the Controller: delete the let‐ter or number.

Press the Controller for an extendedperiod: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters andnumbersDepending on the menu, you can switch be‐tween entering upper and lower case, lettersand numbers:

Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Tip Controller up.

Without navigation system Select symbol.

Entry comparisonEntering names and addresses: choice is nar‐rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ters may be added automatically.

Seite 25

iDrive At a glance


Entries are continuously compared with datastored in the vehicle.▷ Only those letters are offered during input

for which data is available.▷ Destination search: place names can be

entered in all languages that are availableon the Control Display.

Seite 26

At a glance iDrive


Voice activation systemVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

The concept▷ Most functions displayed on the Control

Display can be operated by voice com‐mands via the voice activation system. Thesystem supports you with announcementsduring input.

▷ Functions that can only be used when thevehicle is stationary cannot be used via thevoice activation system.

▷ The system uses a special microphone onthe driver's side.

▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner'sManual to use with the voice activationsystem.

RequirementsVia the Control Display, set a language that isalso supported by the voice activation systemso that the spoken commands can be identi‐fied.Set the language, refer to page 107.

Using voice activationActivating the voice activation system

1. Press button on the steeringwheel.

2. Wait for the signal.3. Say the command.

A command that is recognized by the voiceactivation system is announced and dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐cates that the voice activation system is active.If no other commands are available, use func‐tion via iDrive.

Terminating the voice activationsystem

Briefly press the button on the steer‐ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.

Possible commandsMost menu items on the Control Display canbe voiced as commands.The available commands depend on the menuthat is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐play.There are short commands for many functions.You may select lists such as phone lists viavoice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐actly as they show in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloudYou can have available commands read outloud for you: ›Voice commands‹.E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, thecommands for the settings are read out loud.

Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance


Executing functions using shortcommandsExecute functions on the main menu via shortcommands. It almost doesn't matter whichmenu item is selected, for example, ›Vehiclestatus‹.List of short commands for the voice activationsystem, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐munication Owner's Manual.

Help dialog for the voice activationsystemCalling up help dialog: ›Help‹.Additional commands for the help dialog:▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐

tion about the current operating optionsand the most important commands forthem.

▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: informationabout the principle of operation for thevoice activation system is announced.

One example: opening thetone settingsVia the main menuThe commands of the menu items are spokenjust as they are selected via the Controller.

1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output ifneeded.


3. ›Radio‹4. ›Tone‹

Via short commandThe desired tone settings can also be startedvia a short command.

1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output ifneeded.


3. ›Tone‹

Setting the voice dialogSet system to standard dialog or use a shortversion.The short version of the voice dialog playsback short messages in abbreviated form.

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Speech type:"4. Select setting.

Adjusting the volumeTurn the volume button during the spoken in‐structions until the desired volume is set.▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐

rently used.

Information on EmergencyRequestsDo not use the voice activation system to ini‐tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system


This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ment of a phone connection.Instead, use the SOS button, refer topage 251, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐sis, and speed.

▷ Always say commands in the language ofthe voice activation system.

▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐roof closed to prevent noise interference.

▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehiclewhile speaking.

Seite 29

Voice activation system At a glance


Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicleVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Integrated Owner's Manualin the vehicleThe Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐played on the Control Display. It specificallydescribes features and functions found in thevehicle.

Components of the IntegratedOwner's ManualThe Integrated Owner's Manual consists ofthree parts, which offer various levels of infor‐mation or possible access.

Quick Reference GuideThe Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐tion how to operate the car, how to use basicvehicle functions or what to do in case of abreakdown. This information can also be dis‐played while driving.

Search by imagesImage search provides information and de‐scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Owner's ManualSearch for information and descriptions by en‐tering terms selected from the index.

Select components

1. Press button.2. Turn the Controller: open "Vehicle info".3. Press the Controller.4. Selecting desired range:

▷ "Quick reference"▷ "Search by pictures"▷ "Owner's Manual"

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Page by page with link accessTurn the Controller until the next or previouspage is displayed.

Page by page without link accessScroll through the pages directly while skip‐ping the links.Highlight the symbol once. Now simply pressthe Controller to browse from page to page.

Scroll back.

Scroll forward.

Seite 30

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle


Context help - Owner's Manual to thetemporarily selected functionYou may open the relevant information di‐rectly.

Opening via the iDriveTo move directly from the application on theControl Display to the Options menu:

1. Press button or move the Controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Controlmessage is displayedDirectly from the Check Control message onthe Control Display:"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and theOwner's ManualTo switch from a function, e. g., radio, to theOwner's Manual on the Control Display and toalternate between the two displays:

1. Press button or move the Controllerto the right repeatedly until the "Options"menu is displayed.

2. "Display Owner's Manual"3. Select the desired page in the Owner's

Manual.

4. Press button again to return to lastdisplayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page ofthe Owner's Manual displayed last.

To alternate permanently between the last dis‐played function and the Owner's Manual re‐peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display everytime.

Programmable memory buttons

General informationThe Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐grammable memory buttons and called up di‐rectly.

Storing1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

2. Press selected button for morethan 2 seconds.

ExecutingPress button.The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐

mediately.

Seite 31

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance


BMW eDRIVEVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Hybrid systemSpecial features of the hybrid system

High-voltage systemThis BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to thecombustion engine, the vehicle features ahigh-voltage system that consists of an elec‐tric motor and a high-voltage battery amongother things.

Overview

1 Combustion engine2 Electric motor3 High-voltage cables (orange)4 Control-system electronics, electric motor5 High-voltage battery6 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine

7 Charging control unit8 Charging socket

The conceptThe hybrid system makes it possible to opti‐mize fuel consumption and driving characteris‐tics.An electric motor assists the combustion en‐gine. In certain driving situations, the vehiclecan also be driven using only electric power,thereby reducing fuel consumption.In addition to this, the electric motor acts likean alternator: during braking and coasting, itconverts the vehicle's kinetic energy into elec‐tricity. The current is stored in the high-voltagebattery and is used to drive the electric motor.The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 210,via the charging socket at charging stations orhousehold sockets.

Functions

Electric driving: ePOWERUnder certain conditions, refer to page 75,the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo‐tor.

eDRIVE buttonUsing the eDRIVE button, the characteristicsof the hybrid system can be adjusted, refer topage 76.Adjustable function modes:▷ MAX eDRIVE: electric driving is preferred.▷ SAVE BATTERY: charging condition of the

high-voltage battery is provided for a laterpoint in time.

▷ AUTO eDRIVE: combined operation withcombustion engine and electric motor.

Seite 32

At a glance BMW eDRIVE


Acoustic pedestrian protectionDepending on the country variant, the systemgenerates continuous driving noise, refer topage 77, during electric driving up to approx.20 mph/30 km/h.

Acceleration boostDriving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐ergy.To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuelconsumption, the electric motor boosts thecombustion engine, refer to page 78. To dothis, the electric motor uses the energy savedin the high-voltage battery.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe Auto Start/Stop function, refer topage 74, switches the combustion engine offwhen coasting, braking and while the vehicle isstopped. Convenience functions such as theautomatic climate control are supplied by thehigh-voltage battery and can remain switchedon.

Driving with combustion engine:POWERThe combustion engine, refer to page 77,provides the primary performance to move thevehicle. If necessary, the high-voltage batteryis charged at the same time.The hybrid system always starts the combus‐tion engine automatically.

Energy recovery: CHARGEThe high-voltage battery of the hybrid systemis charged through energy recovery while driv‐ing.The electric motor acts as a generator andconverts the kinetic energy of the vehicle intoelectric current.Charging can take place in various situations:▷ When the vehicle is coasting if the acceler‐

ator pedal is not pressed.

▷ During vehicle braking.When exerting gentle pressure on the brakes,the vehicle is only braked by the electric motor.When the brake pedal is depressed further, thebrake system is activated additionally. This iswhy only part of the brake energy is used tocharge the high-voltage battery when exertingfirm pressure on the brake.Foresighted driving and the early reduction ofspeed are important to make full use of the hy‐brid characteristics of the vehicle.

CoastingThe engine is automatically switched off. Thisdriving condition of rolling is referred to ascoasting, refer to page 77.

Climate control functions duringparking and chargingThe hybrid system makes it possible to oper‐ate the automatic climate control prior to driv‐ing off and with the combustion engineswitched off.During vehicle charging or if the high-voltagebattery is sufficiently charged, the car's interiorcan be pre-tempered.Air conditioning can also be directly switchedon via iDrive or using the My BMW RemoteApp.▷ Climate control at departure time, refer to

page 216▷ Stationary climate control, refer to

page 178

Adapting to the course of the roadWhen the navigation system destination guid‐ance is active, the hybrid system uses the ex‐isting navigation data. The upcoming course ofthe road is analyzed. Hybrid operation adaptsto the specific route sections. These may be:▷ Steep gradients.▷ Arrival in the destination zone.

Seite 33

BMW eDRIVE At a glance


Pay attention to the notes in Adapting to thecourse of the road, refer to page 94.

DisplayThe displays of the hybrid system, refer topage 92, provide information about the cur‐rent state of hybrid operation and show thesystem activity in a chart.

Energy-saving drivingTo save energy while driving, read the follow‐ing information:▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 204.▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to

page 196▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 205.▷ Adapting to the course of the road, refer to

page 94.

Safety informationRead the information on safe handling of thehigh-voltage system, refer to page 35.

Long-termFollow the instructions for vehicle storage andfor longer idle periods, refer to page 260.

Seite 34

At a glance BMW eDRIVE


Safety of the high-voltage systemHybrid system workThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat no changes be made to the vehicle, for in‐stance installation of retrofitting accessories,that will have an effect on the vehicle’s hybridsystem.

DANGERImproperly executed work, in particular

maintenance and repair on the high-voltagesystem can lead to electric shock. There is riskof injury, fire and danger to life. The manufac‐turer of your vehicle recommends that thework on the vehicle, in particular maintenanceand repair, be performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Hybrid system: contact withwaterThe hybrid system is typically safe even in thefollowing example situations:▷ Water in the floor area, for instance after a

rainstorm when sunroof was kept open.▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the al‐

lowed height.▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.In these cases there is no risk of injury fromelectrocution. Other damage to the vehicle ispossible.

Hybrid system: automaticdeactivationIf an accident occurs, the hybrid system isswitched off automatically to prevent risk ofdanger to occupants and other traffic.

Read the information on What to do after anaccident, refer to page 256.

Seite 35

Safety of the high-voltage system At a glance



ControlsThe information in this chapter helps you in

confidentially operating your vehicle. All featuresand accessories that are useful for driving and

your safety, comfort and convenience aredescribed here.


Opening and closingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Remote control/keyGeneral informationThe vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐trols with integrated key.Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐tery.You may set the key functions depending onthe optional features and country-specific ver‐sion. For Settings, refer to page 49.The vehicle stores personal settings for everyremote control. Personal Profile, refer topage 39.The remote controls hold information on re‐quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐mote control, refer to page 243

Overview

1 Unlocking2 Locking3 Opening the tailgate4 Panic mode

Integrated key

Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐row 2.The integrated key fits the following locks:▷ Driver's door.▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side.

Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing


Replacing the battery

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐trol.

2. Place the integrated key underneath thebattery compartment cover, arrow 1, andlift the cover with a lever movement of theintegrated key.

3. Remove battery compartment cover, ar‐row 2.

4. Insert a battery of the same type with thepositive side facing up.

5. Press the cover closed.Have old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop

or take them to a collection point.

New remote controlsNew remote controls are available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controlsThe lost remote control can be blocked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Emergency detection of remotecontrolDrive readiness can also be activated in the fol‐lowing situations:

▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐mote control by external sources for exam‐ple, by radio masts.

▷ Empty battery in remote control.▷ Interference from radio transmissions

through mobile devices in close proximityto remote control.

▷ Interference of radio transmission by acharging process of a mobile device, forexample charging of a mobile phone.

A Check Control message is displayed if oneattempts to turn on the radio-ready state or ac‐tivate drive readiness.

Activating drive readiness

If a respective Check Control message ap‐pears, hold the remote control with its backagainst the marked area on the steering col‐umn. The tailgate button on the remote controlshould be at the same height as the markedarea. Press the Start/Stop button within10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.If the remote control is not detected, slightlychange the height position of the remote con‐trol and repeat the procedure.

Personal ProfileThe conceptUsing Personal Profile, individual settings forseveral drivers can be saved and called upagain at a later time.

Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls


General informationThere are three profiles with which personalvehicle settings can be stored. Every remotecontrol has one of these profiles assigned.If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐tomatically applied.If several drivers use their own remote control,the vehicle will adjust the personal settingsduring unlocking. These settings are also re‐stored, if the vehicle has been used in themeantime by a person with a different remotecontrol.Changes to the settings are automaticallysaved in the profile currently activated.If another profile is selected via iDrive, the set‐tings saved in it will be applied automatically.The new profile is assigned to the remote con‐trol currently used.There is an additional profile available that isnot assigned to any remote control: It can beused to apply settings in the vehicle withoutchanging the personal profiles.

AdjustingThe settings for the following systems andfunctions are saved in the active profile. Thescope of storable settings is country- andequipment-dependable.▷ Unlocking and locking.▷ Lights.▷ Climate control.▷ Radio.▷ Instrument cluster.▷ Programmable memory buttons.▷ Volumes, tone.▷ Control Display.▷ Navigation.▷ Park Distance Control PDC.▷ Rearview camera.

▷ Side View.▷ Top View.▷ Head-up Display.▷ Driving Dynamics Control.▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐

tion, steering wheel position.▷ Intelligent Safety.▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.▷ Night vision.

Profile management

Opening profilesRegardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ferent profile may be activated.About iDrive:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Select a profile.▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile

are automatically applied.▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐

mote control being used at the time.▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐

ent remote control, this profile will apply toboth remote controls. It cannot be differen‐tiated anymore between the settings forthe two remote controls.

Renaming profilesA personal name can be assigned to every pro‐file to avoid confusion between the profiles.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Rename current profile"

Seite 40



Resetting profilesThe settings of the active profile are reset totheir default values.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Reset current profile"

Exporting profilesMost settings of the active profile can be ex‐ported.This can be helpful for securing and retrievingpersonal settings, before delivering the vehicleto a workshop, for example. Profiles can betaken to another vehicle equipped with thePersonal Profile function.The following export options are available:▷ Via BMW Online.▷ Via the USB port to a USB device.

Popular file systems for USB devices aresupported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ommended formats for profile export.Other formats may not support the export.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Export profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Importing profilesProfiles exported via BMW Online can also beimported via BMW Online.Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ported via the USB interface.Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ported profile.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Import profile"4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"

USB interface: "USB device"

Using the guest profileThe guest profile is for individual settings thatare saved in none of the three personal pro‐files.This can be useful for drivers who are usingthe vehicle temporarily and do not have theirown profile.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. "Guest"The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is notassigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during startThe profile list can be displayed during eachstart to select the desired profile.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Profiles"3. Open "Options".4. "Display user list at startup"

Using the remote controlInformation

WARNINGPeople or animals in the vehicle can lock

the doors from the inside and lock themselvesin. The vehicle can then not be opened fromthe outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the

Seite 41



remote control along so that the vehicle can beopened from the outside.◀

UnlockingPress button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 49,the following access points are unlocked.▷ Driver's door.▷ All doors and tailgate.In addition, the following functions are exe‐cuted:▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it

is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are alsoswitched on. This function is not available,if the interior lamps were switched off man‐ually.

▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if thisfunction was activated.

▷ The alarm system, refer to page 50, isswitched off.

Convenient openingPress and hold this button on the re‐mote control after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof areopened, as long as the button on the remotecontrol is pressed.

LockingWARNINGUnlocking from the inside is only possi‐

ble with special knowledge.If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there isrisk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock thevehicle from the outside when there are peoplein it.◀

The driver's door must be closed.Press button on the remote control.

The alarm system, refer to page 50, isswitched on.If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lockthe car, this means that the engine or ignitionis still switched on. In this case, the engine orignition must be switched off by means of theStart/Stop button.

Switching on interior lights andcourtesy lights

Press button on the remote control withthe vehicle locked.

The courtesy lamps are only switched on whenit is dark outside. This function is not available,if the interior lamps were switched off man‐ually.If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 51, areturned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐fore pressing the button again.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control forat least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Opening the tailgateCAUTIONThe tailgate swings back and up when it

opens. There is risk of property damage. Makesure that the area of movement of the tailgateis clear during opening and closing.◀

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.

Press button on the remote control forapprox. 1 second and release.

Seite 42



The closed tailgate is automatically opened,whether or not the vehicle is locked or un‐locked.Depending on the features and the countryversion, it is also possible to have door un‐locked. Create the settings, refer to page 49.The tailgate cannot be opened with the remotecontrol while a trailer is being towed.If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate islocked again as soon as it closes. Take the re‐mote control with you and do not leave it in thecargo area; otherwise, the remote control islocked inside the vehicle when the tailgate isclosed.

CAUTIONSharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors whiledriving. There is risk of property damage.Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐jects do not hit the rear window.◀

MalfunctionRemote control detection by the vehicle canamong others be malfunctioning under the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐

charged. Replace the battery, refer topage 39.

▷ Interference of the radio connection fromtransmission towers or other equipmentwith high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

▷ Interference of the radio connection frommobile phones or other electronic devicesin direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metal objects or electronic devices.In the case of interference, the vehicle can alsobe unlocked and locked from the outside with‐out remote control, refer to page 43.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ LX8766S.▷ LX8766E.▷ LX8CAS.▷ LX8CAS2.▷ MYTCAS4.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and▷ this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Without remote controlFrom the outside

WARNINGUnlocking from the inside is only possi‐

ble with special knowledge.If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there isrisk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock thevehicle from the outside when there are peoplein it.◀

CAUTIONThe door lock is permanently joined with

the door. The door handle can be moved.When pulling the door handle with theintegrated key inserted, paint or key can be

Seite 43



damaged. There is risk of property damage.Remove the integrated key before pulling theoutside door handle.◀

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the doorlock using the integrated key, refer to page 38.The other doors must be unlocked or lockedfrom the inside.

1. Remove lid on the door lock.To do this, slide the integrated key into theopening from below and remove the lid.

2. Unlock or lock door lock.

Alarm systemThe alarm system is not armed if the vehicle islocked with the integrated key.The alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, if the vehicle was unlocked via thedoor lock.In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehiclewith the remote control or switch on the igni‐tion, if needed, through emergency detectionof the remote control, refer to page 39.

From the inside

Unlocking and locking

Via the buttons for the central locking system.

▷ By pressing the button, the vehicleis locked with the doors closed.

▷ Pressing the button unlocks thevehicle.

The vehicle is not secured against theft whenlocking.The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked. The hazard warningsystem and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening▷ Press the central locking system

button to unlock the doors to‐gether, and then pull the door handleabove the armrest.

▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on thedoor to open the door. The other doors re‐main locked.

▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handleon the door to be opened; the first time un‐locks the door, the second time opens it.The other doors remain locked.

Seite 44



DoorsAutomatic Soft ClosingTo close the doors, push lightly.It is closed automatically.

WARNINGThanks to Soft Close the closing goes

into the lock automatically. Body parts can bejammed. There is risk of injuries. Make surethat the area of movement of the doors is clearduring opening and closing.◀

TailgateInformationTo avoid locking it into the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Makesure that the area of movement of the tailgateis clear during opening and closing.◀

Automatic tailgate operation

Adjusting the opening heightYou can set how far the tailgate should open.

CAUTIONThe tailgate swings back and up when it


When adjusting the opening height, ensurethat there is a clearance of at least 4 in‐ches/10 cm above the tailgate.

1. "Settings"2. "Tailgate"

3. Turn the Controller until the desired open‐ing height is selected.


OpeningCAUTIONThe tailgate swings back and up when it


▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.

▷ Press button on the remote con‐trol for approx. 1 second.

As the case may be, the doors are also un‐locked. Opening with the remote control,refer to page 42.The tailgate cannot be opened with the re‐mote control while a trailer is being towed.

▷ Press button in the driver's door.The tailgate cannot be opened with

the remote control while the driver's dooris opened.

If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opensautomatically to the adjusted opening height.The opening procedure is interrupted:▷ By pressing a button again.▷ When starting the engine.▷ When the vehicle starts moving.▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the

tailgate.

Seite 45



ClosingCAUTIONSharp-edged or pointed objects can hit

the rear window and heat conductors whiledriving. There is risk of property damage.Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐jects do not hit the rear window.◀

To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.The lower tailgate must be closed; otherwise, aCheck Control message will appear.The floor panel in the cargo area must beclosed, otherwise the tailgate cannot beclosed.Without Comfort Access:

▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

With Comfort Access:

▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of thetailgate.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Press button, arrow 2.The vehicle will be locked after closing thetailgate. The driver's door must be closedfor this purpose and the remote controlmust be outside of the vehicle in the areaof the tailgate.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.Pressing the button again stops the mo‐tion.

▷ Pull and hold the button in the driverdoor. Releasing the button stops

window/roof movement.The remote control must be located in theinterior for this function.

An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgatecloses.The closing operation is interrupted:▷ When starting the engine.▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Manual operationWARNINGWith manual operation of a blocked tail‐

gate, it can loosen itself unexpectedly from theblockage. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Do not operate the tailgatemanually if it is blocked. Have it checked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.◀

Seite 46



In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slowand smooth motion.Manually unlocking the tailgate, refer topage 47.

Manual unlockingWhen there is an electrical malfunction.

1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.2. In the lower tailgate, loosen and remove

the cover using the onboard vehicle tool kitor a suitable object.

3. Pull the loop in the direction of the interior.The tailgate is unlocked.

4. The top tailgate opens, press the loop backin.

5. Insert and close the cover.The tailgate is locked again as soon as it isclosed.

Lower tailgate

Opening

Pull the lever and swing down the tailgate.

The open tailgate can be loaded with up to550 lbs/250 kg.

ClosingSwing up the tailgate, and press it closed.

Comfort AccessThe conceptThe vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ing the remote control.All you need to do is to have the remote con‐trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.The vehicle automatically detects the remotecontrol when it is in close proximity or in thecar's interior.Comfort Access supports the following func‐tions:▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.▷ Convenient closing.▷ Opening the tailgate individually.▷ Start the engine.

InformationTo avoid locking it into the vehicle, do notplace the remote control in the cargo area.

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Makesure that the area of movement of the tailgateis clear during opening and closing.◀

Functional requirements▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence nearby.▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle nearthe doors.

▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is notpossible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Seite 47



▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐mote control is in the vehicle.

Unlocking

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,arrow.This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control.

Locking

Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicledoor, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐ond without grasping the door handle.This corresponds with pressing the button on the remote control.To save battery power, ensure that the ignitionand all electronic systems and/or power con‐sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐cle.

Convenient closingWARNINGWith convenient closing, body parts can

be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make surethat the area of movement of the doors is clearduring convenient closing.◀

Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicledoor, arrow, with your finger and hold it therewithout grasping the door handle.This corresponds with pressing and holdingthe button on the remote control.

In addition to locking, the windows and theglass sunroof close and the exterior mirrorsfold in.

Unlocking the tailgate separatelyPress button on tailgate's exterior.This corresponds with pressing the button

on the remote control.The situation of the doors does not change.Take the remote control with you and do notleave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐mote control is locked inside the vehicle whenthe tailgate is closed.

CAUTIONThe tailgate swings back and up when it


Seite 48



MalfunctionRemote control detection by the vehicle canamong others be malfunctioning under the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐

charged. Replace the battery, refer topage 39.

▷ Interference of the radio connection fromtransmission towers or other equipmentwith high transmit power.

▷ Shielding of the remote control due tometal objects.

▷ Interference of the radio connection frommobile phones or other electronic devicesin direct proximity.

Do not transport the remote control togetherwith metal objects or electronic devices.In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lockthe vehicle using the buttons of the remotecontrol or using the integrated key, refer topage 43.

AdjustingUnlockingThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 39.

Doors1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function:

▷ "Driver's door only"Only the driver's door and the fuel fillerflap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐locks the entire vehicle.

▷ "All doors"The entire vehicle is unlocked.

TailgateDepending on optional features and countryversion, this setting is not offered in somecases.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the symbol.4. Select the desired function:

▷ "Tailgate"The tailgate is opened.

▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"The tailgate is opened and the doorsunlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicleThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 39.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐

mation signals.▷ With alarm system:

"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"Unlocking is signaled by one honk ofthe horn.

▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,locking by one.

Automatic lockingThe settings are saved in the active profile, re‐fer to page 39.

1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. Select the desired function:

▷ "Lock if no door is opened"The vehicle locks automatically after ashort period of time if no door isopened after unlocking.

Seite 49



▷ "Lock after start driving"The vehicle locks automatically afteryou drive off.

Retrieving the seat, mirror, andsteering wheel settingsThe driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steeringwheel position adjusted last will be stored forthe active profile.When the vehicle is unlocked, these positionsare automatically retrieved if this function wasactivated.

WARNINGThere is risk of jamming when moving

the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐justment.◀

The adjustment procedure is interrupted:▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and

steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.

Activating the setting1. "Settings"2. "Doors/key"3. "Last seat position autom."

Alarm systemThe conceptWhen the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarmsystem responds to:▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.▷ Movements in the interior.▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐

tempts at stealing a wheel or when towingthe car.

▷ Disconnected battery voltage.The alarm system briefly signals tampering:

▷ Acoustic alarm.▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐

tem.▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Switching on and offWhen you unlock or lock the vehicle, eitherwith the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐cess, the alarm system is switched on and offat the same time.

Door lock with the alarm systemswitched onThe alarm system is triggered when the door isopened, when the vehicle is unlocked via thedoor lock.Switching off the alarm, refer to page 51.

Tailgate with the alarm systemswitched onThe tailgate can be opened even when thealarm system is switched on.After the tailgate is closed, it is locked andmonitored again when the doors are locked.The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic modeYou can trigger the alarm system if you findyourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control forat least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Seite 50



Indicator lamp on the interior mirror

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every2 seconds:The alarm system is switched on.

▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐onds:Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensorare not active, as doors, hood, or tailgateare not correctly closed. Correctly closedaccess points are secured.When the still open access points areclosed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarmsensor will be switched on.

▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ing:The vehicle has not been tampered with.

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlockinguntil the engine ignition is switched on, butno longer than approx. 5 minutes:An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensorThe tilt of the vehicle is monitored.The alarm system responds in situations suchas attempts to steal a wheel or when the car istowed.

Interior motion sensorThe windows and glass sunroof must beclosed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarmsThe tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor can be switched off together, such as inthe following situations:▷ In automatic car washes.▷ In duplex garages.▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐

cles, at sea or on a trailer.▷ With animals in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior motion sensor

Press the remote control button againwithin 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle

is locked.The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐onds and then continues to flash.The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐sor are turned off until the vehicle is lockedagain.

Switching off the alarm▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or

switch on the ignition, if needed throughemergency detection of remote control, re‐fer to page 39.

▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carryingthe remote control on your person, graspthe driver side or front passenger side doorhandle completely.

Power windowsInformation

WARNINGUnattended children or animals can

move the vehicle and endanger themselvesand traffic, for example with the following ac‐tions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.

Seite 51



▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

Overview

Power windows

Safety switch

Opening

▷ Press the button to the resistancepoint.The window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ance point.The window opens automatically. Pressingthe switch again stops the motion.

See also: Convenient opening, refer topage 42, via remote control.

ClosingWARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make sure

that the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistancepoint.The window closes while the switch isheld.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistancepoint.The window closes automatically. Pullingagain stops the motion.

See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,refer to page 47.

Pinch protection systemWARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts

and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐juries or risk of property damage. Make surethat the area of movement of the windows isclear during opening and closing.◀

WARNINGAccessories on the windows such as an‐

tennas can impact jam protection. There is riskof injuries. Do not install accessories in thearea of movement of the windows.◀

If closing force exceeds a specific margin as awindow closes, closing is interrupted.The window reopens slightly.

Closing without the pinch protectionsystem

WARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts


Seite 52



In case of danger from the outside or if icemight prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐lows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance pointand hold it there.The pinch protection is limited and thewindow reopens slightly if the closing forceexceeds a certain margin.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance pointagain within approx. 4 seconds and hold itthere.The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch

General informationThe safety switch in the driver's door can beused to prevent children, for example, fromopening and closing the rear windows usingthe switches in the rear.

InformationWARNINGWhen operating the windows, body parts


In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of thewindows, press the safety switch, for exampleif children or animals are carried in the rear.

Switching on and offPress button.The LED lights up if the safety func‐

tion is switched on.

Roller sunblindsRoller sunblinds for the rear sidewindowsPull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hookit onto the bracket.

WARNINGWith closed roller sunblinds and open

windows, the roller sunblinds can be loadedheavily while driving due to the wind. The rollersunblinds can be damaged and compromisethe passengers. There is risk of injuries. Do notopen the windows while driving if the rollersunblinds are closed.◀

Panoramic glass sunroofGeneral informationThe glass sunroof and the sliding visor can beoperated together or separately, using thesame switch.The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐tion is switched on.

InformationWARNINGBody parts can be jammed on operating

the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.Make sure that the area of movement of theglass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ing.◀

Seite 53




move the vehicle and endanger themselvesand traffic, for example with the following ac‐tions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

Tilting up and closing tilted glasssunroof

Push switch briefly upward.▷ The closed glass sunroof is

tilted and the sliding visoropens slightly.

▷ The opened glass sunroofcloses until it is in its tiltedposition. The sliding visordoes not move.

▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.The sliding visor does not move.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor separately

▷ Press the switch in the de‐sired direction to the resist‐ance point and hold it there.The sliding visor opens, aslong as the switch is helddown. If the sliding visor isalready fully open, the glasssunroof opens.The glass sunroof closes aslong as the switch is helddown. If the glass sunroof is

already closed or in the tiltedposition, the sliding visorcloses.

▷ Press the switch in the desired directionpast the resistance point.The sliding visor opens automatically. If thesliding visor is already fully open, the glasssunroof opens automatically.The glass sunroof closes automatically. Ifthe glass sunroof is already closed or in thetilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐tomatically.Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐tion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof andsliding visor together

Briefly press the switch twice insuccession in the desired direc‐tion past the resistance point.The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐sor move together. Pressing the

switch upward stops the motion.

▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer topage 42, via remote control.

▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐cess, refer to page 47.

Comfort positionIf the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐pletely opened, the comfort position has beenattained. In this position the wind noises in theinterior are the least.If desired, continue the movement by Pressingthe switch.

Pinch protection systemIf the closing force when closing the glass sun‐roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ment is stopped, beginning at approximatelythe middle of the opening in the roof, or from

Seite 54



the tilted position during closing. The glasssunroof reopens slightly.

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed on operating


Closing from the open positionwithout pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐lows:

1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐sistance point and hold.The pinch protection is limited and theglass sunroof reopens slightly if the closingforce exceeds a certain margin.

2. Press the switch forward again beyond theresistance point and hold until the glasssunroof closes without jam protection.Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised positionwithout pinch protectionIf there is an external danger, push the switchforward past the resistance point and hold it.The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐tion.

Initializing after a power failureAfter a power failure during the opening orclosing process, the glass sunroof can only beoperated to a limited extent.

Initializing the systemThe system can be initialized when the vehicleis stationary and the engine is running.During the initialization, the glass sunroofcloses without jam protection.

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed on operating


Press the switch up and hold ituntil the initialization is com‐plete:▷ Initialization begins within

15 seconds and is com‐pleted when the glass sun‐roof and sliding visor arecompletely closed.

▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐tection.

Seite 55



AdjustingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Sitting safelyThe ideal seating position meeting the needsof the occupants can make a vital contributionto relaxed, fatigue-free driving.The seating position plays an important role inan accident in combination with:▷ Safety belts, refer to page 59.▷ Head restraints, refer to page 61.▷ Airbags, refer to page 115.

Front seatsInformation

WARNINGSeat adjustments while driving can lead

to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehiclecontrol could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's sidewhen the vehicle is stationary.◀

WARNINGWith a backrest inclined too far to the

rear, the protective effect of the safety beltcannot be ensured anymore. There is a dangerof sliding under the safety belt in an accident.There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjustthe seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the

backrest in an as upright position as possibleand do not adjust again while driving.◀



Electrically adjustable seats

Overview

1 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory2 Shoulder support3 Backrest width4 Lumbar support5 Backrest, head restraint6 Forward/back, height, tilt7 Thigh support

General informationThe seat setting for the driver's seat is storedfor the profile currently used. When the vehicleis unlocked via the remote control, the positionis automatically retrieved if the Function, referto page 50, is activated for this purpose.

Seite 56

Controls Adjusting


Adjustments in detail

Forward/back.

Height.

Seat tilt.

Backrest tilt

Thigh support

Multifunctional seat

Adjust the position using the lever.

Sport seat

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjustthe thigh support.

Lumbar supportThe curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐gion of the spine. The lower back and thespine are supported for upright posture.

▷ Press the front/rear sectionof the switch:The curvature is increased/decreased.

▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐tion of the switch:The curvature is shifted up/down.

Seite 57

Adjusting Controls


Backrest widthChange the width of the back‐rest using the side wings to ad‐just the lateral support.

Shoulder support

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching onPress button once for each tempera‐ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 205, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching offPress and hold the button, until theLEDs go out.

Temperature distributionThe heating action in the seat cushion andbackrest can be distributed in different ways.About iDrive:

1. "Climate"2. "Front seat heating"3. Select desired seat.4. Turn the Controller to set the temperature

distribution.

Active seat ventilation, front

The conceptThe seat cushion and backrest surfaces arecooled by means of integrated fans.The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐cle interior is overheated or for continuouscooling at high temperatures.

Overview

Active seat ventilation

Seite 58

Controls Adjusting


Switching onPress button once for each ventilationlevel.

The highest level is active when three LEDsare lit.

After a short time, the system automaticallymoves down one level in order to prevent ex‐cessive cooling.


Rear seatsSecond row of seats

InformationWARNINGThere is a risk of jamming when folding

down the center armrest in the rear. There isrisk of injuries. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the center armrest is clear duringfolding down.◀

Rear seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching onPress button once for each tempera‐ture level.

The maximum temperature is reached whenthree LEDs are lit.If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐cally with the temperature selected last.When ECO PRO, refer to page 205, is acti‐vated, the heater output is reduced.


Safety beltsNumber of safety beltsThe vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐sure occupant safety. However, they can onlyoffer protection when adjusted correctly.The two outer safety belt buckles, integratedinto the 2nd row of seats, are for passengerssitting on the left and right.The center safety belt buckle of the 2nd row ofseats is solely intended for the person sitting inthe middle.

General informationAlways make sure that safety belts are beingworn by all occupants before driving off.For the occupants' safety the belt lockingmechanism triggers early. Slowly guide thesafety belt out of the holder when applying it.Although airbags enhance safety by providingadded protection, they are not a substitute forsafety belts.The upper shoulder strap's anchorage pointwill be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Seite 59

Adjusting Controls


InformationWARNINGIf the safety belt is used by more than

one person, the protective effect of the safetybelt cannot be ensured anymore. There is riskof injuries or danger to life. Do not allow morethan one person to wear a single safety belt.Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐spectively secured in designated child restraintsystems.◀

WARNINGThe protective effect of the safety belts

can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastenedsafety belt can cause additional injuries, for ex‐ample in the event of an accident or duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is riskof injuries or danger to life. Make sure that alloccupants are wearing safety belts correctly.◀

WARNINGWith a rear backrest that is not locked,

the protective function of the middle safetybelt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuriesor danger to life. If you are using the middlesafety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀

Correct use of safety belts▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight

to your body as possible over your lap andshoulders.

▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hipsover your lap. The safety belt may notpress on your stomach.

▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it inacross hard or fragile objects.

▷ Avoid thick clothing.▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐

ward around your upper body.

Buckling the seat belt

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage inthe belt buckle.To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, anadjustable slider is available on the belt to helpposition the buckle when not in use.

Tensioning the safety beltautomaticallyWhen the safety belt is buckled, the belt strapis automatically tightened once after the vehi‐cle drove off.

Unbuckling the safety belt1. Hold the safety belt firmly.2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up

mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's andpassenger's seat

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐nal sounds. Make sure that the safetybelts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds aboveapprox. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activatedif objects are placed on the front passengerseat.

Safety modeIn critical situations, for example during anemergency stop, the front safety belts tightenautomatically.

Seite 60

Controls Adjusting


If the situation passes without an accident oc‐curring, the belt tension relaxes.If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safetybelt using the red button in the buckle. Fastenthe safety belt before continuing on your trip.

Damage to safety beltsWARNINGThe protective effect of the safety belts

may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐ing situations:▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or

changed in any other way.▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily

soiled.▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were

modified.Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged inthe event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐ries or danger to life. Do not modify safetybelts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, beltretractors or belt anchors and keep themclean. Have the safety belts checked after anaccident at the dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.◀

Front head restraintsInformation

WARNINGA missing protective effect due to re‐

moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐straints can cause injuries in the head andneck area. There is risk of injuries. Install headrestraints on occupied seats prior to drivingand make sure that the center of the head re‐straint supports the back of the head at eyelevel.◀

WARNINGObjects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck area.There is risk of injuries.▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.▷ Do not hang objects, for example, clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint.▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐

termined to be safe for attachment to ahead restraint.

▷ Do not use any accessories, for examplepillows, while driving.◀

Correctly adjusted head restraint

General informationA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at eye level.

DistanceAdjust the distance so that the head restraintis as close as possible to the back of the head.

Active head restraintIn the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐ically reduces the distance from the head.Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐aged otherwise:Have the active head restraint checked and ifneeded replaced.

Seite 61

Adjusting Controls


Adjusting the height: electrical headrestraints

Adjusting electrically.

Distance to the back of the head:electrical head restraintsThe head restraint is automatically reposi‐tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.

Adjusting the side extensions

Fold forward for increased lateral support inthe resting position.

RemovingThe head restraints cannot be removed.

Rear head restraintsInformation

WARNINGA missing protective effect due to re‐

moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐straints can cause injuries in the head and

neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install headrestraints on occupied seats prior to drivingand make sure that the center of the head re‐straint supports the back of the head at eyelevel.◀

WARNINGObjects on the head restraint reduce the

protective effect in the head and neck area.There is risk of injuries.▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.▷ Do not hang objects, for example, clothes

hangers, directly on the head restraint.▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐

termined to be safe for attachment to ahead restraint.

▷ Do not use any accessories, for examplepillows, while driving.◀

Correctly adjusted head restraint

General informationA correctly adjusted head restraint reduces therisk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the eventof an accident.

HeightAdjust the head restraint so that its center isapproximately at eye level.

Adjusting the height

▷ To raise: push.▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push

headrest down.

Seite 62

Controls Adjusting


The center head restraint cannot be adjustedin elevation.

RemovingOnly remove the head restraint if no one will besitting in the seat in question.

1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐sistance.

2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐straint out completely.

The center head restraint cannot be removed.

Seat, mirror, and steeringwheel memoryThe conceptTwo driver's seat and exterior mirror positionscan be stored per profile, refer to page 39, andcalled up. Settings for the backrest width andlumbar support are not stored in memory.

InformationWARNINGUsing the memory function while driving

can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheelmovements. Vehicle control could be lost.There is risk of an accident. Only retrieve thememory function when the vehicle is station‐ary.◀



Overview

Storing1. Switch on the ignition.2. Set the desired position.

3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ton lights up.

4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LEDis lit. The LED goes out.

Button was pressed inadvertently:Press button again.

The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

Comfort function1. Open the driver's door.2. If necessary, switch off the ignition.3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.The corresponding seat position is performedautomatically.The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

Seite 63

Adjusting Controls


Safety mode1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐

nition.2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2

until the adjustment procedure is com‐pleted.

Calling up of a seat positiondeactivatedAfter a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐tions is deactivated to save battery power.To reactivate calling up of a seat position:▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.▷ Press a button on the remote control.▷ Press the Start/Stop button.

MirrorsExterior mirrors

General informationThe mirror on the passenger side is morecurved than the driver's side mirror.Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ror setting is stored for the profile currentlyused. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐mote control, the position is automatically re‐trieved if this function is active.

InformationWARNINGObjects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. The distance to the trafficbehind could be incorrectly estimated, for ex‐ample while changing lanes. There is risk of anaccident. Estimate the distance to the trafficbehind by looking over your shoulder.◀

Overview

1 Adjusting 642 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor3 Fold in and out 65

Selecting a mirrorTo change over to the other mirror:Slide the switch.

Adjusting electricallyThe setting corresponds to the direc‐tion in which the button is pressed.

Saving positionsSeat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 63.

Adjusting manuallyIn case of electrical malfunction press edges ofmirror.

Automatic Curb Monitor

The conceptIf reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass onthe front passenger side is tilted downward.This improves your view of the curb and otherlow-lying obstacles when parking, for example.

Seite 64

Controls Adjusting


Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's sidemirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

DeactivatingSlide the switch to the passenger side mirrorposition.

Fold in and outCAUTIONDepending on the vehicle width, the ve‐

hicle can be damaged in car washes. There isrisk of property damage. Before washing, foldin the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀

Press button.

Possible at speeds up to approx.15 mph/20 km/h.Folding the mirrors in and out is advantageousin the following situations:▷ In car washes.▷ On narrow roads.▷ For folding mirrors back out that were

folded away manually.Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐matically at a speed of approx.25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heatingBoth exterior mirrors are automatically heatedwhenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming featureBoth exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐med. Photocells are used to control the Interiormirror, refer to page 65.

Interior mirror, automatic dimmingfeature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:▷ In the mirror glass.▷ On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements▷ Keep the photocells clean.▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheelInformation

WARNINGSteering wheel adjustments while driving

can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There isrisk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is stationary only.◀

Seite 65

Adjusting Controls


Power steering wheel adjustment

Adjusting

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐rections.

Storing the positionSeat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, referto page 63.

Heated steering wheel

Overview

Heated steering wheel

Switching on/offPress button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.

Seite 66

Controls Adjusting


Transporting children safelyVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


The right place for childrenInformation



Children should always be in the rearWARNINGChildren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot

correctly fasten the safety belt without suitableadditional restraint systems. The protective ef‐fect of the safety belts can be limited or lostwhen safety belts are fastened incorrectly. Anincorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐ditional injuries, for example in the event of anaccident or during braking and evasive maneu‐vers. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Secure persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm usingsuitable restraint systems.◀

Accident research shows that the safest placefor children is in the rear seat.Only transport children younger than 13 yearsof age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear insuitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐cordance with the age, weight and size of thechild.Children 13 years of age or older must wear asafety belt as soon as a suitable child restraintsystem can no longer be used due to their age,weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seatShould it ever be necessary to use a child re‐straint system in the front passenger seat,make sure that the front, knee and side airbagson the front passenger side are deactivated.Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ger airbags, refer to page 117.

InformationWARNINGActive front-seat passenger airbags can

injure a child in a child restraint system whenthe airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐ries. Make sure that the front-seat passengerairbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀

Seite 67

Transporting children safely Controls


WARNINGThe stability of the child restraint system

is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fitssecurely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐just the backrest tilt for all affected backrestsand correctly adjust the seats. Make sure thatseats and backrests are securely engaged. Ifpossible, adjust the height of the head re‐straints or remove them.◀

Installing child restraintsystemsInformationPay attention to the specifications of the childrestraint system manufacturer when selecting,installing, and using child restraint systems.


is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fitssecurely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐just the backrest tilt for all affected backrestsand correctly adjust the seats. Make sure thatseats and backrests are securely engaged. Ifpossible, adjust the height of the head re‐straints or remove them.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbagsWARNINGActive front-seat passenger airbags can

injure a child in a child restraint system whenthe airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger

airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀

After installing a child restraint system in thefront passenger seat, make sure that the front,knee and side airbags on the front passengerside are deactivated.Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbagsautomatically, refer to page 117.

Seat position and heightBefore installing a child restraint system, movethe front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtainthe best possible position for the belt and tooffer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐dent.If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐til the best possible belt guide position isreached.

Backrest widthAdjustable backrest width: before installing achild restraint system in the front passengerseat, open the backrest width completely. Donot change the backrest width again and donot call up a memory position.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passengersafety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ten child restraint systems.

Seite 68

Controls Transporting children safely


Locking the safety belt1. Pull out the belt strap completely.2. Secure the child restraint system with the

safety belt.3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull

it tight against the child restraint system.The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.2. Remove the child restraint system.3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐

pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing systemInformationLATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐dren.Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐mation of the child restraint system manufac‐turer when installing and using LATCH childrestraint fixing system.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchorsThe lower anchors may be used to attach theCRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined childand CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the childis restrained by the internal harnesses.

InformationWARNINGIf the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐

tems are not correctly engaged, the protectiveeffect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐chors are securely engaged and that theLATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐curely against the backrest.◀

PositionThe corresponding symbol shows themounts for the lower LATCH anchors.Seats equipped with lower anchors aremarked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐bols. It is not recommended to use theinner lower anchors of standard outer

LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint

system on the middle seat. Use the vehicleseat belt instead for the middle seat.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐cated in the gap between the seat and back‐rest.

Before installing LATCH childrestraint fixing systemsPull the safety belt away from the area of thechild restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraintfixing systems1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐

turer's information.2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Seite 69



Child restraint system with a tetherstrap

Mounting pointsThe respective symbol shows the an‐chor for the upper retaining strap.Seats with an upper Top Tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found onthe rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

InformationCAUTIONThe mounting points for the upper re‐

taining straps of child restraint systems areonly provided for these retaining straps. Whenother objects are mounted, the anchors can bedamaged. There is risk of property damage.Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐per retaining straps.◀

Retaining strap guideWARNINGIf the upper retaining strap is incorrectly

used for the child restraint system, the protec‐tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap isnot guided across sharp edges and withouttwisting to the upper retaining strap.◀

1 Direction of travel2 Head restraint3 Hook for upper retaining strap4 Mounting point

5 Seat backrest6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap tothe mounting point1. Raise the head restraint if needed.2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between

the backrest and the cargo cover.4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to

the anchor.5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it

down.6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.

Securing of doors andwindows in the rearRear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outsideonly.

Safety switch for the rearPress button on the driver's door.The LED lights up if the safety func‐

tion is switched on.

Seite 70

Controls Transporting children safely


This locks various functions so that they can‐not be operated from the rear. Safety switch,refer to page 53.

Seite 71



DrivingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Start/Stop button, drivereadinessThe concept

The following ready states canbe attained by pressing theStart/Stop button:▷ Radio ready state on/off.▷ Ignition on/off.

▷ Activating/deactivating drive readiness.To activate drive readiness, press the brakepedal.Drive readiness cannot be activated, as long asthe charging cable is connected, refer topage 211.

Switching radio-ready state on/offThe radio-ready state is activated by pressingthe Start/Stop button in the following situa‐tions:▷ When the engine is running.▷ When drive readiness is activated.▷ When the engine is switched off automati‐

cally using the Auto Start/Stop function.Some electronic systems/power consumersremain ready for operation.

Radio ready state is switched off automatically:▷ After approx. 8 minutes.▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐

tral locking system.▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged

completely, so that the engine can still bestarted.

If the engine is switched off and the ignition isswitched on, the system automaticallyswitches to the radio-ready state if the lightsare turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,the daytime running lights are activated.

Ignition onPress the Start/Stop button, and do not presson the brake pedal at the same time.All vehicle systems are ready for operation.Most of the indicator and warning lights in theinstrument cluster light up for a varied lengthof time.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition offPress the Start/Stop button again withoutstepping on the brake.All indicator lights in the instrument cluster goout.To save battery power when the engine is off,switch off the ignition and any unnecessaryelectronic systems/power consumers.

InformationWhen switching off the ignition, the selectorlever position P is selected automatically if theselector lever position D or R is selected.The ignition is switched off automatically in thefollowing situations while the vehicle is station‐ary and the engine is off:

Seite 72

Controls Driving


▷ When locking the vehicle, and when thelow beams are activated.

▷ Shortly before the battery is dischargedcompletely, so that the engine can still bestarted. This function is only availablewhen the low beams are turned off.

▷ When opening and closing the driver door,if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled andthe low beams are turned off.

▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckledwith driver's door open and low beams off.

The low beams switch to parking lights afterapprox. 10 minutes of no use.When the ignition is switched off automaticallyby opening or closing the driver's door, un‐buckling the driver's safety belt or by the auto‐matic switching of the low beams to parkinglights, the radio-ready state remains active.

Drive readinessWhen drive readiness is activated, the vehicleis operational. Activated drive readiness is theequivalent of a running engine in conventionalvehicles. Deactivated drive readiness is equiv‐alent to switching the ignition off.

Drive readiness in detailThe conceptThe following are the different drive readinessvariants:▷ Electric drive readiness, Silent Start, refer

to page 74.The vehicle is powered by the electric mo‐tor.

▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer topage 74.The vehicle is powered by the combustionengine.

InformationWARNINGWhen driving in electric mode, pedes‐

trians and other traffic might pay less attentionto the vehicle due to missing engine noise.There is risk of an accident. Adjust the drivingstyle to the traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively interfere in the respectivesituations.◀

WARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into

motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle againstrolling.In order to ensure that the vehicle is securedagainst rolling away, observe the following:▷ Set the parking brake.▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the

front wheels in the direction of the curb.▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure

the vehicle, for example with a wheelchock.◀



Activating drive readiness1. Close the driver's door.2. Depress the brake pedal.

Seite 73

Driving Controls


3. Press the Start/Stop button.Drive readiness is active, electric driving, SilentStart or Start of the combustion engine.

Electric drive readiness, Silent StartThe vehicle is ready for driving without startingthe combustion engine.Silent Start is possible if the requirements forElectric driving, refer to page 76, are met.

DisplayREADY indicates drive readi‐ness.

Starting the combustion engineDANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases canenter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep theexhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐tion.◀





CAUTIONIn the case of repeated starting attempts

or repeated starting in quick succession, thefuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.The catalytic converter can overheat. There isrisk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐ing in quick succession.◀

The combustion engine is started with Acti‐vate drive readiness, refer to page 73, underthe following conditions:▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is

too high or too low.▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐

cient charge.

Driving away1. Activate drive readiness.2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or R.3. Release the parking brake.4. Drive away.

Deactivating drive readinessAfter stopping the vehicle:

1. Engage selector lever position P.2. Press the Start/Stop button.3. Set the parking brake.After parking the vehicle, you may hear noisesdue to operation of the hybrid system, such asfor cooling of the high-voltage battery.

Before driving into a car washSo that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐serve instructions for going into an automaticcar wash, refer to page 257.

Auto Start/Stop functionThe conceptThe Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.The system switches off the combustion en‐gine when conditions for electric driving have

Seite 74

Controls Driving


been met. The ignition or drive readiness re‐mains switched on.The tachometer registers 0 rpm. If necessary,the combustion engine starts automatically.The combustion engine is also stopped duringthe trip when rolling out or braking. This drivingcondition, in which the vehicle is travellingwithout power and energy recovery is not ac‐tive, is referred to as coasting, refer topage 77.

InformationThe combustion engine is not switched off au‐tomatically in the following situations:▷ The combustion engine is not at operating

temperature.▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐

tion M/S.▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged

or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur‐dened.

▷ High stress of the automatic climate con‐trol in the heating or cooling phase.

▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the cur‐

rent driving style, for instance during thebreak-in period or after a service appoint‐ment.

▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning.

Safety modeAn automatically stopped combustion enginedoes not start independently:▷ When the driver's door is open and neither

the brake nor accelerator pedal are de‐pressed.

▷ When the hood is unlocked.The indicator lights come on. The combustionengine can only be started via the Start/Stopbutton.

Switching off the vehicle during anautomatic engine stopDuring an automatic engine stop, the vehiclecan be switched off permanently, e. g., whenleaving it.

1. Press the Start/Stop button.▷ The ignition is switched off.▷ The radio-ready state is activated.▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐

vated.▷ Transmission position P is engaged

automatically.2. Set the parking brake.

MalfunctionThe Auto Start/Stop function no longerswitches of the combustion engine automati‐cally in the event of a malfunction. A messageis displayed. It is possible to continue driving.Have the system checked.

Electric driving: ePOWERInformation

WARNINGWhen driving in electric mode, pedes‐

trians and other traffic might pay less attentionto the vehicle due to missing engine noise.There is risk of an accident. Adjust the drivingstyle to the traffic conditions. Watch trafficclosely and actively interfere in the respectivesituations.◀

General informationIn ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclusivelyelectrically. ePOWER works automatically.Depending on the charging state of the high-voltage battery, maximum speed and rangeachieved can vary.For electrical driving, certain Conditions, referto page 76, must be satisfied.

Seite 75

Driving Controls


Displays of the hybrid system, refer topage 92.

Requirements▷ State of charge and temperature of the

high-voltage battery is sufficient.▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged.▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode se‐

lected.▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐

pressed.▷ The possible maximum speed for electric

driving is not exceeded.▷ The driver's door is closed.

eDRIVE button

Overview

eDRIVE button

General informationUsing the eDRIVE button, the characteristicsof the hybrid system can be adjusted.The function modes can be manually activatedin the following sequence:▷ MAX eDrive, refer to page 76▷ SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 76▷ Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 76

Auto eDRIVE

General informationWith each starting operation, Auto eDRIVE isactivated using the Start/Stop button.In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybridmode corresponding to the various driving sit‐uations, i.e. the drive combines combustionengine and electric motor. The respectivelymost effective drive type is preferred.

MAX eDRIVE

General informationMAX eDRIVE forces electricdriving.With MAX eDRIVE, a speed ofapprox. 75 mph, approx.120 km/h is possible.

In certain situations, the speed limit may bedeliberately exceeded. The combustion engineis automatically started and switched intoAUTO eDRIVE mode. Automatic starting of thecombustion engine while driving, refer topage 77.

Activating MAX eDRIVEPress button repeatedly until MAXeDRIVE is displayed in the instrument

cluster.When pressing the button, the current eDRIVEsetting is graphically displayed on the ControlDisplay.

SAVE BATTERY

General informationShould it be necessary, for ex‐ample, to conserve the electricalrange for a later point in time onthe trip, the current chargingstate of the high-voltage battery

can be maintained with this function.

Seite 76

Controls Driving


The acceleration boost by the electric motormay be restricted.The function is only available if sufficient fuel isavailable and in selector lever position D.Energy recovery can possibly increase thecharging state up to approx. 50 %.Depending on the driving style, a further in‐crease of the charging state is possible.

Activating SAVE BATTERYPress button repeatedly until SAVEwith the battery symbol is displayed in

the instrument cluster.When pressing the button, the current eDRIVEsetting is graphically displayed on the ControlDisplay.

CoastingThe combustion engine is automatically stop‐ped and disengaged from the drivetrain. Thisdriving condition of rolling is referred to ascoasting.

RequirementsCoasting is possible:▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently

charged.▷ Transmission position D is engaged.▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐

ture.▷ The driver's door is closed.▷ In ECO PRO: mode, when coasting, with‐

out operating the brake, at speeds below100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.

After the coasting, the combustion or electricmotor restarts depending on the operatingstate.

Acoustic pedestrian protectionDepending on the country-specific version, thesystem generates a continuous driving noise

during electric driving up to approx.20 mph/30 km/h.A speaker system broadcasts the noise to thesurroundings.As a result, other traffic participants, for exam‐ple pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceivethe vehicle.

Switching on/offDepending on the country-specific version, thesystem is automatically active after every driv‐ing-off or the system can be set on the ControlDisplay.

1. "Settings"2. "Pedestr. Protection"3. "Activate"

Driving with combustionengine: POWERThe combustion engine provides the primaryperformance to move the vehicle. If necessary,the high-voltage battery is charged at thesame time.

Automatic start while drivingThe combustion engine is automaticallystarted under the following conditions whiledriving:▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond

the resistance point at the full throttle posi‐tion, kickdown.

▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged.▷ The speed for electric driving is exceeded

while accelerating.▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐

cient charge.▷ High-voltage battery is completely

charged, for example, when driving down‐hill.

▷ During intense accelerations or on inclines.

Seite 77

Driving Controls


▷ System-related requirement for hybridcomponents.

▷ Adapting to the course of the road whendestination guidance is activated.

Automatic parking while drivingWhen reducing speed, the combustion engineis switched off when the conditions for electricdriving, refer to page 76, are met.

Assistance for thecombustion engineThe combustion engine provides the primaryperformance to move the vehicle.The electric motor provides assistance asneeded with additional propulsive power.

EASSISTDuring normal vehicle operation, the electricmotor assists the combustion engine, depend‐ing on the situation.

eBOOSTAccelerating quickly, such as when passing,requires the maximum available power fromthe electric motor. To do this, apply extra forceto the accelerator pedal.

Energy recovery: CHARGEThe hybrid system makes it possible to con‐vert kinetic energy into electrical power whenbraking and coasting. This recovered energycharges the high-voltage battery. If necessary,this stored electrical energy is output to theelectric motor.The following conditions must be met to re‐cover kinetic energy:▷ The vehicle is moving.▷ Selector lever position D, M/S is set.

▷ The high-voltage battery is not fullycharged.

Energy recovery displays in the instrumentcluster, refer to page 93.Depending on the settings of the Driving Dy‐namics Control, refer to page 148, the high-voltage battery is charged at different speedsand the vehicle decelerated differently whilecoasting.

Parking brakeThe conceptThe parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐cle from rolling when it is parked.

InformationWARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into





move the vehicle and endanger themselvesand traffic, for example with the following ac‐tions:▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Using vehicle equipment.

Seite 78

Controls Driving


There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

Overview

Parking brake

SettingPull the switch.The LED lights up.

The indicator lamp lights up red. Theparking brake is set.

While drivingUse as emergency brake while driving:Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakeshard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐nal sounds and the brake lights lightup.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.

ReleasingWith the ignition switched on:

Steptronic transmission: Press theswitch while the brake is pressed or se‐

lector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator lamp go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars withSteptronic transmissionFor automatic release, step on the acceleratorpedal.The LED and indicator lamp go out.The parking brake is automatically releasedwhen you step on the accelerator:▷ Drive readiness on.▷ Drive mode engaged.▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic Hold

The conceptThis system assists the driver by automaticallysetting and releasing the brake, such as whenmoving in stop-and-go traffic.The vehicle is automatically held in place whenit is stationary.On inclines, the system prevents the vehiclefrom rolling backward when driving off.

Overview

Automatic Hold

Seite 79

Driving Controls


Safety informationWARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into




Under the following conditions, AutomaticHold is automatically deactivated and the park‐ing brake is set:▷ Drive readiness is deactivated.▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is

unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐

still using the parking brake.The indicator lamp switches fromgreen to red and the letters AUTO H goout.

ActivatingThis function can be activated when the driv‐er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened,and drive readiness is activated and the engineis running.

Press button.The LED and the letters AUTO H light

up.

The indicator lamp lights up.Automatic Hold is activated.

DeactivatingPress button again.

The LED and the letters AUTO H go out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐matic Hold is deactivated automatically.

DrivingAutomatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐ing to a standstill.

The indicator lamp lights up green.Step on the accelerator pedal to driveoff.

The brake is released automatically.The indicator lamp goes out.

CAUTIONIf the vehicle is stationary, Automatic

Hold engages the parking brake. It preventsthe vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There isrisk of property damage. Deactivate AutomaticHold prior to entering the car wash.◀

ParkingThe parking brake is automatically set if drivereadiness is deactivated while the vehicle isbeing held by Automatic Hold.

The indicator lamp changes from greento red.

The parking brake is not set if drive readinessis deactivated while the vehicle is coasting to ahalt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.Automatic Hold remains activated during theengine stop brought about by the Auto Start/Stop function.


move the vehicle and endanger themselvesand traffic, for example with the following ac‐tions:

Seite 80

Controls Driving


▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.▷ Releasing the parking brake.▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.▷ Engaging selector lever position N.▷ Using vehicle equipment.There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do notleave children or animals unattended in the ve‐hicle. Carry remote control along when exitingand lock the vehicle.◀

MalfunctionIn the event of a failure or malfunction of theparking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.

Manual releaseWARNINGAn unsecured vehicle can put itself into




The parking brake can be released manually inthe event of a power failure or electrical fault.

UnlockingIf the parking brake has been released man‐ually in response to a malfunction, only quali‐fied technicians should return it to operation.

1. Open the left side trim in the cargo area.2. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard

vehicle tool kit into the strap of the releasepoint, see arrow.

3. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up againstthe mechanical resistance until you noticea marked increase in the resistance andthe parking brake releases audibly.

4. Stow the screwdriver and close the leftside trim in the cargo area.

After a power failureWARNINGThe function of the parking brake is not

ensured if it was unlocked manually withoutpower loss. There is risk of an accident. Onlyoperate the parking brake if it was unlockedmanually due to a power loss.◀

Putting the parking brake intooperation1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the switch while stepping onthe brake pedal or selector lever position Pis set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to beput into operation. Any sounds associated withthis are normal.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out as soon as the parkingbrake is ready for operation.

Seite 81

Driving Controls


Turn signal, high beams,headlight flasherTurn signal

Turn signal in exterior mirrorWhen driving and during operation of the turnsignals or hazard warning system, do not foldin the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lightson the exterior mirror are easy to see.

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐sition after actuation.To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever tothe resistance point.

Triple turn signal activationSlightly tap lever.The turn signal flashes three times.The function can be activated or deactivated.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Triple turn signal"Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Signaling brieflyPress the lever to the resistance point and holdit there for as long as you want the turn signalto flash.

MalfunctionUnusually rapid flashing of the indicator lampindicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

▷ High beams, arrow 1.▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper systemSwitching the wipers on/off and briefwipe

General informationDo not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,as this may damage the wiper blades or causethem to become worn more quickly.

InformationWARNINGIf the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There isrisk of injuries or risk of property damage.Make sure that the vehicle is switched offwhen the wipers are in the folded away stateand the wipers are folded in when switchingon.◀

Seite 82

Controls Driving


CAUTIONIf the wipers are frozen to the windshield,

the wiper blades can be torn off and the wipermotor overheat on switching on. There is riskof property damage. Defrost the windshieldprior to switching the wipers on.◀

Switching on

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operationwhen the vehicle is stationary.

▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap oncebeyond the resistance point.Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐hicle comes to standstill.

Switching off and brief wipe

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐sition when released.▷ Single wipe: press down once.▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:

press down once.

▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: pressdown twice.

Interval mode or rain sensor

The conceptWithout the rain sensor, the frequency of thewiper operation is preset.The rain sensor automatically controls the timebetween wipes depending on the intensity ofthe rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐shield, directly behind the interior mirror.

Activating/deactivating

Press button on the wiper lever.Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equippedwith a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiperoperation is deactivated.During trip interruption with the rain sensorswitched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐cally activated again.

CAUTIONIf the rain sensor is activated, the wipers

can accidentally start moving in car washes.There is risk of property damage. Deactivatethe rain sensor in car washes.◀

Seite 83

Driving Controls


Setting the frequency or sensitivity ofthe rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequencyor sensitivity of the rain sensor.Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rainsensor.Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rainsensor.

Clean the windshield, headlights

Pull the wiper lever towards you.The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐vated.

WARNINGThe washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐

dow at low temperatures and obstruct theview. There is risk of an accident. Only use thewasher systems, if the washer fluid cannotfreeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀

CAUTIONWhen the wiper water container is

empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐tended. There is risk of property damage. Donot use the washer system when the wash wa‐ter container is empty.◀

Windshield washer nozzlesThe windshield washer nozzles are automati‐cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Switching on the rear window wiper

Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward,arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear isengaged, the system switches to continuousoperation.

Cleaning rear windowIn interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐row 2. The switch automatically returns to itsinterval position when released.In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐sition when released.

Fold-out position of the wipersFold wipers back when you want to change theblades or with pending low temperatures.

WARNINGIf the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is

Seite 84

Controls Driving


risk of injuries or risk of property damage.Make sure that the vehicle is switched offwhen the wipers are in the folded away stateand the wipers are folded in when switchingon.◀

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.2. With icy conditions make sure that blades

are not frozen to the windshield.3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point

of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐onds, until the wiper remains in a nearlyvertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, thewiper system must be reactivated.

1. Switch on the ignition.2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to

their resting position and are ready againfor operation.

Washer fluidGeneral informationAll washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ervoir.Prepare a mixture of tap water, windshieldwasher concentrate, and possibly antifreezeprior to filling.Recommended minimum fill quantity:0.2 US gal/1 liter.

InformationWARNINGSome antifreeze agents can contain

harmful substances and are flammable. Thereis risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe theinstructions on the containers. Keep antifreezeaway from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐erating materials out of reach of children.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio isregulated by the U.S. EPA and many individualstates; do not exceed the allowable washerfluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow theusage instructions on the washer fluid con‐tainer.Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀

WARNINGWasher fluid can ignite and catch fire on

contact with hot engine parts. There is risk ofinjuries or risk of property damage. Only addwasher fluid when the engine is cooled down.Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ervoir.◀

CAUTIONSilicon-containing additives in the

washer fluid for the water-repelling effect onthe windows can lead to damage to the wash‐ing system. There is risk of property damage.Do not add silicon-containing additives to thewasher fluid.◀

CAUTIONThe use of undiluted and different wind‐

shield washer concentrate or antifreeze canlead to damage to the washing system. Thereis risk of property damage. Dilute windshieldwasher concentrate or antifreeze prior to filling.Observe the information and mixing ratios pro‐vided on the containers. Do not mix windshieldwasher concentrates of different manufactur‐ers.◀

Seite 85

Driving Controls


Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐gine compartment.

Steptronic transmissionInformation





Selector lever positions

D DriveSelector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ation. All gears for forward travel are activatedautomatically.

R ReverseSelect only when the vehicle is stationary.

N NeutralThe vehicle may roll. Use in automatic carwashes, for example.When the ignition is switched off, refer topage 72, selector lever position P is engagedautomatically.

P ParkSelect only when the vehicle is stationary. Thedrive wheels are blocked.Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐cally in the following situations:▷ After drive readiness is deactivated with

radio-ready state, refer to page 72, or igni‐tion off, refer to page 72, and selector leverposition D or R is engaged.

▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐tion N is engaged.

▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, thedriver's door is opened, and the brakepedal is not pressed while the vehicle isstationary and selector lever position Dor R is engaged.

KickdownKickdown is used to achieve maximum drivingperformance. Step on the accelerator pedalbeyond the resistance point at the full throttleposition.

Engaging selector lever positions

General informationTo prevent the vehicle from creeping after youselect a gear, maintain pressure on the brakepedal until you are ready to start.▷ Selector lever position P can only be disen‐

gaged when the vehicle drive readiness isswitched on and the brake pedal is de‐pressed.

▷ With the vehicle stationary, depress thebrake pedal before shifting out of selector

Seite 86

Controls Driving


lever position P or N; otherwise, the shiftblock will not be deactivated and the shiftcommand will not be executed.

A block prevents the inadvertent switching toselector lever position P or R or the inadvertentchange from selector lever position P.

Canceling the lock

Press unlock button, arrow.

Engaging selector lever position D, N,R

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.After releasing the selector lever, it returns toits center position.

Engage selector lever position P

Press P button, arrow.

Sport program and manual mode

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐tor lever position D.The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster, for example, S1.The sport program of the transmission is acti‐vated.eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto StartStop function are deactivated. Coasting to astandstill and braking phases are used moreoften to recover energy. Depending on thedriving situation, the high-voltage battery ischarged at different speeds. Fuel consumptioncan increase.

Activating the M/S manual mode1. Press the selector lever to the left out of

selector lever position D.

Seite 87

Driving Controls


2. Push the selector lever forward or pull itbackward.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and thegear is changed.The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster, for example, M1.If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐mission continues to shift automatically.Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐shifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐

wards.Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, for example downshifting isnot possible if the engine speed is too high.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐lected gear.

Ending the sport program/manualmodePush the selector lever to the right.D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allowyou to shift gears quickly while keeping bothhands on the steering wheel.

▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.▷ With the respective transmission version,

the lowest possible gear can be selectedby pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engineand road speeds, for example downshifting isnot possible if the engine speed is too high.The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐strument cluster, followed by the current gear.If the shift paddles on the steering wheel areused to shift gears in automatic mode, thetransmission temporarily switches to manualmode.In the manual mode, after conservative drivingfor a certain amount of time or if there hasbeen no acceleration or shifting of the shiftpaddles within a certain amount of time, thetransmission switches back to automaticmode.If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐sition D with the respective transmission ver‐sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐matic mode:▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.

or▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift

paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

Displays in the instrument clusterThe selector lever position is dis‐played, for example: P.

Electronic unlocking of thetransmission lock

General informationElectronically unlock the transmission lock tomaneuver vehicle from the danger area.

Seite 88

Controls Driving


Engaging selector lever position N1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter

must audibly start. Press and hold theStart/Stop button

3. Press the unlock button on the selectorlever and press and hold the selector leverinto selector lever position N, until selectorlever position N is displayed in the instru‐ment cluster.A corresponding Check Control messageis displayed.

4. Release Start/Stop button and selectorlever.

5. Release brake, as soon as the starterstops.

6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger areaand secure it against moving on its own.

Seite 89

Driving Controls


DisplaysVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge 982 Speedometer3 Messages, for example, Check Control4 Tachometer 98

5 Engine oil temperature 986 Current fuel consumption7 Electronic displays 908 Reset miles 99

Electronic displays▷ Displays of the hybrid system, refer to

page 92.▷ Selection lists, refer to page 103.▷ External temperature, refer to page 99.

▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 74.▷ Onboard computer, refer to page 103.▷ Date, refer to page 99.▷ Transmission display, refer to page 88.

Seite 90

Controls Displays


▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 99.▷ Charging screen, refer to page 91.▷ Messages, for example Check Control, re‐

fer to page 94.▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to

page 100.▷ Navigation display, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

▷ Range, refer to page 99.▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to

page 148.▷ Service requirements, refer to page 101.▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 102.▷ Time, refer to page 99.

Charging screen

1 Charging status 2152 End of charging time 215

Departure time with timer 2163 Maximum electrical range 215

4 Timer, departure time 2165 Stationary climate control 2166 Range for electric driving 2157 Charging state 215

Seite 91

Displays Controls


Displays of the hybridsystemDisplays in the instrument cluster

The conceptThe following functions of the hybrid systemare displayed:▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer

to page 92.▷ MAX eDrive, refer to page 93▷ SAVE BATTERY, refer to page 93.▷ Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to

page 92.▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to

page 93.▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to

page 93.▷ Drive readiness: READY, refer to

page 92.The display depends on the system's operat‐ing condition.

InformationWARNINGEven if no bars are displayed in the bat‐

tery symbol, the high-voltage system is stillunder high voltage. There is risk of fire or riskof injuries. Do not touch or change live parts,for example orange high-voltage cables, evenwhen the batteries are discharged.◀

High-voltage battery charge indicator

When drive readiness is switched on in COM‐FORT mode, displays the available charge ofthe high-voltage battery with bars in a batterysymbol. If five bars are shown, the high-voltagebattery is fully charged.

Drive readiness: READYREADY indicates drive readi‐ness. For further information,please refer to Drive readinessin detail, refer to page 73.

Electric driving: ePOWER

When driving with Auto eDRIVE in the COM‐FORT and ECO PRO driving programs, thepower output of the electric motor is indicatedby arrows on the instrument cluster.Depending on the position of the acceleratorpedal, up to four arrows are displayed simulta‐neously. The tachometer pointer stays on 0rpm.

Seite 92

Controls Displays


If all four arrows are displayed, the combustionengine is activated when the accelerator pedalis further depressed.

For further information, please refer to Electricdriving: eDRIVE, refer to page 75.

Energy recovery: CHARGE

Depending on the driving program and eDRIVEmode, energy recovery is displayed using ar‐rows or bars underneath the CHARGE displayin the instrument cluster. The high-voltagebattery is being charged.

For further information, please refer to Energyrecovery CHARGE, refer to page 78.

Acceleration boost: eBOOST

If the electric motor supports the combustionengine, for example during rapid acceleration,eBOOST, refer to page 78, is displayed.

Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE

The display follows Activating the MAXeDRIVE mode, refer to page 76, via theeDRIVE button.

SAVE BATTERYThe display follows Activatingthe SAVE BATTERY function,refer to page 76.

The high-voltage energy available for electricdriving is conserved for a later point in the trip.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying the hybrid systemutilization1. "Vehicle info"2. "eDRIVE"3. "Consumption history"

Hybrid system utilization

The gray bars show the fuel consumption bythe combustion engine, arrow 1. Blue bars in‐

Seite 93

Displays Controls


dicate the percentage utilization of the func‐tions of the hybrid system, arrow 2.One bar indicates one minute.The combustion engine's average fuel con‐sumption is indicated by a line above the bardisplay and as a value to the right of the graph.

Displaying the energy flow1. "Vehicle info"2. "eDRIVE"3. "Energy flow"

Energy flow of the hybrid system

The following are displayed:▷ Active components of the hybrid system.▷ Direction of the energy flows:

Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐gine.Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system.

▷ Vehicle states:▷ EPOWER.▷ POWER.▷ eBOOST.▷ CHARGE.▷ Coasting.▷ Charging.

▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,e. g., drive system not yet warmed up tooperating temperature.

▷ Driving requirement, e. g., transmission se‐lector lever in the M/S position.

Adapting to the course of the roadWhen the navigation system destination guid‐ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to spe‐cific route sections.Use of the hybrid system is optional.Symbols in the energy flow display indicatethat a situation has been detected ahead andhybrid operation is prepared for it.

Symbols

Symbol Meaning

Downhill gradients: the system isready to charge the high-voltagebattery.

Target zone: ePOWER electric driv‐ing is being prepared.

Check ControlThe conceptThe Check Control system monitors functionsin the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctionsin the monitored systems.A Check Control message is displayed as acombination of indicator or warning lights andtext messages in the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display.In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and atext message may appear on the Control Dis‐play.

Indicator/warning lights

General informationThe indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐nations and colors.Several of the lights are checked for properfunctioning and light up temporarily when theengine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Seite 94

Controls Displays


Red lights

Safety belt reminderSafety belt on the driver's side is notbuckled. For some country-specificmodels: passenger belt is not worn or

objects are detected on the front passengerseat.Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on thedriver or passenger side is not buckled. Thesafety belt reminder can also be activated ifobjects are placed on the front passenger seat.Make sure that the safety belts are positionedcorrectly.

Airbag systemAirbag system and belt tensioner arenot working.Have the vehicle checked immediately

by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

Parking brakeThe parking brake is set.For additional information, refer to Re‐lease parking brake, refer to page 79.

Brake systemBraking system disrupted. Continue todrive moderately.Have the vehicle checked immediatelyby a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Front-end collision warningIlluminated: advance warning is issued,e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ger of a collision or the distance to the

vehicle ahead is too small.Increase distance.

Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ger of a collision when the vehicle approachesanother vehicle at a relatively high differentialspeed.Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐neuver.

Pedestrian warningSymbol in the instrument cluster.If a collision with a person detected inthis way is imminent, the symbol lights

up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise ControlThe number bars shows the selecteddistance from the vehicle drivingahead.

For additional information, refer to ActiveCruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC,refer to page 151.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise ControlIlluminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐tected.Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐

quate for operating the system.The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABSAvoid sudden braking as much as pos‐sible. Braking force boost may not beworking. Take into account the longerbrake distance. Have the system im‐

Seite 95

Displays Controls


mediately checked by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

DSC Dynamic Stability ControlFlashing: DSC controls the drive andbraking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving

style to the driving circumstances.Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the systemchecked by a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.For additional information, refer to DynamicStability Control DSC, refer to page 144.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control isdeactivated or DTC Dynamic TractionControl is activated

Dynamic Stability Control DSC isswitched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐trol DTC is switched on.

For additional information, refer to DynamicStability Control DSC, refer to page 144, andDynamic Traction Control DTC, refer topage 145.

Flat Tire Monitor FTMThe Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss oftire inflation pressure in a tire.Reduce your speed and stop cau‐

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐neuvers.For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐fer to page 122.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPMIlluminated: the Tire Pressure Monitorsignals a loss of tire inflation pressurein a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoidsudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flashing and then continuously illuminated: noflat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can bedetected.▷ Interference through systems or devices

with the same radio frequency: After leav‐ing the area of the interference, the systemautomatically becomes active again.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics ismounted: Have it checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified servicecenter or repair shop as needed.

▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐tor, refer to page 118.

Steering systemSteering system in some cases notworking.Have the steering system checked by a

dealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Engine functionsHave the vehicle checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

For additional information, refer to On-boardDiagnostics socket, refer to page 244.

Lane departure warningSystem is switched on and under cer‐tain circumstances warns if a detectedlane is left without flashing beforehand.

For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ture warning, refer to page 138.

Seite 96

Controls Displays


Acoustic pedestrian protection inactiveAcoustic pedestrian protection possi‐bly not working.Have the system checked by a dealer’s

service center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Green lights

Turn signalTurn signal switched on.Unusually rapid flashing of the indicatorlamp indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed.For additional information, refer to Turn signal,refer to page 82.

Parking lights, headlight controlParking lights or headlights are acti‐vated.For additional information, refer to

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐fer to page 110.

Front fog lightsFront fog lights are activated.For additional information, refer toFront fog lights, refer to page 113.

High-beam AssistantHigh-beam Assistant is switched on.High beams are activated and off auto‐matically as a function of the traffic sit‐

uation.For additional information, refer to High-beamAssistant, refer to page 113.

Cruise controlThe system is switched on. It maintainsthe speed that was set using the con‐trol elements on the steering wheel.

Automatic HoldFunction is activated. The vehicle is au‐tomatically held in place when it is sta‐tionary.

For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐fer to page 79.

Blue lights

High beamsHigh beams are activated.For additional information, refer to Highbeams, refer to page 82.

General lamps

Check ControlAt least one Check Control message isdisplayed or is stored.

Text messagesText messages in combination with a symbolin the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐trol message and the meaning of the indicatorand warning lights.

Supplementary text messagesAdditional information, such as on the cause ofan error or the required action, can be called upvia Check Control.With urgent messages the added text will beautomatically displayed on the Control Display.

SymbolsDepending on the Check Control message, thefollowing functions can be selected.

Seite 97

Displays Controls


▷ "Owner's Manual"Display additional information about theCheck Control message in the IntegratedOwner's Manual.

▷ "Service request"Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repairshop.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.

▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐played continuously and are not cleareduntil the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐sages are displayed consecutively.These messages can be faded for approx.8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐played again automatically.

▷ Other Check Control messages are fadedautomatically after approx. 20 seconds.They are stored and can be displayedagain later.

Displaying stored Check ControlmessagesOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completionSpecial messages displayed while driving aredisplayed again after the ignition is switchedoff.

Fuel gaugeVehicle tilt position may causethe display to vary.Depending on the equipmentversion, the arrow beside thefuel pump symbol shows which

side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.Hints on refueling, refer to page 218.

High-voltage battery chargeindicator

The current battery chargingstate of the high-voltage batterycan be displayed as %-value.

TachometerAlways avoid engine speeds in the red warningfield. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐rupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at

the low temperature end.Drive at moderate engineand vehicle speeds.

▷ Normal operating tempera‐ture: the pointer is in the

Seite 98

Controls Displays


middle or in the left half ofthe temperature display.

▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end ofthe temperature range. A Check Controlmessage is also displayed.

Coolant temperatureIf the coolant along with the engine becomestoo hot, a Check Control message is displayed.Check the coolant level, refer to page 241.

Odometer and trip odometerDisplay

▷ Odometer, arrow 1.▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.

Show/reset kilometersPress the knob.▷ When the ignition is

switched off, the time, theexternal temperature andthe odometer are displayed.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the tripodometer is reset.

External temperatureIf the indicator drops to+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signalsounds.A Check Control message isdisplayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

WARNINGEven at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃

there can be a danger of icy roads, for exampleon bridges or shady sections of road. There isrisk of an accident. Adjust your driving style tothe weather conditions at low temperatures.◀

TimeThe time is displayed at the bot‐tom of the instrument cluster.Setting the time and time for‐mat, refer to page 106.

DateThe date is displayed in the on‐board computer.Setting the date and date for‐mat, refer to page 106.

RangeThe conceptThe range can be displayed as range for elec‐tric driving or as total range. The total rangeconsiders the capacity of the fuel tank as wellas the electric energy in the high-voltage bat‐tery.

Display, electric rangeThe range in MAX eDRIVE modeis displayed on the onboardcomputer.

Seite 99

Displays Controls


Display total rangeWith a low remaining range:▷ A Check Control message is

displayed briefly.▷ The remaining range is

shown on the onboard com‐puter.

▷ With a dynamic driving style, for exampletaking curves aggressively, the enginefunction is not always ensured.

The Check Control message is continuouslydisplayed below a certain range.As soon as a respectively low fuel tank fillinglevel is reached, MAX eDRIVE is automaticallyselected to protect the combustion engine ifthe requirements for electric driving are met.The Steptronic Sport program is not available.You may continue driving with reduced per‐formance and exclusively with electric motorpower.

CAUTIONWith a range of less than 30 miles/50 km

it is possible that the engine will no longer havesufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐sured anymore. There is risk of property dam‐age. Refuel promptly.◀

CAUTIONIf the range is too small, the norma drive

power is not available. Engine functions are notensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐fuel as soon as possible.◀

Observe further Hints on refueling, refer topage 218.

Displaying the cruising rangeDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the range can also be displayed as bar in theinstrument cluster.

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"

3. "Additional indicators"

With navigation system: range withdestination guidance active

If respective equipment is fittedand destination guidance is ac‐tive, the remaining range is dis‐played when the destination isreached.

Current fuel consumptionThe conceptThe current fuel consumption of the combus‐tion engine and of the electric motor can bedisplayed.

Combustion engine displayDepending on your vehicle's op‐tional features, the current fuelconsumption can be displayedin the instrument cluster. Checkwhether you are currently driv‐

ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendlymanner.This display is available in the SPORT pro‐gram.

Display, electric motorThe current electric consumption is displayedon the onboard computer.

The current electric energy con‐sumption or generation can bemonitored.Consumed energy: + signGenerated energy: - sign

Seite 100

Controls Displays


Service requirementsThe conceptAfter the ignition is turned on the instrumentcluster briefly displays available driving dis‐tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐nance.A service advisor can read out the currentservice requirements from your remote con‐trol.

Display

Detailed information on servicerequirementsMore information on the scope of service re‐quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and le‐gally mandated inspections are displayed.

4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐tion.

Symbols

Sym‐bols

Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled mainte‐nance or a legally mandated inspec‐tion is approaching.

The service deadline has alreadypassed.

Entering appointment datesEnter the dates for the required inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time areset correctly.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Service required"4. "§ Vehicle inspection"5. "Date:"6. Adjust the settings.7. Confirm.The entered date is stored.

Automatic Service RequestData regarding the service status or legallymandated vehicle inspections are automati‐cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐ter before a service due date.You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐ter was notified.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. Open "Options".4. "Last Service Request"

Gear shift indicatorThe conceptThe system recommends the most fuel effi‐cient gear for the current driving situation.

General informationDepending on the vehicle's features and coun‐try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐tronic transmission.Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

Seite 101

Displays Controls


On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, theengaged gear is displayed.

Displaying

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed limit detectionThe concept

Speed limit detectionSpeed limit detection shows the current maxi‐mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐ter. The camera in the area of the interior mir‐ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the roadas well as variable overhead sign posts. Trafficsigns with extra symbols for wet road condi‐tions, etc. are also detected and comparedwith the vehicle's onboard data, such as for therain sensor, and will be displayed dependingon the situation. The system takes into ac‐count the information stored in the navigationsystem and also displays speed limits presenton routes without signs.

InformationWARNINGThe system does not relieve from the

personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐cident. Adjust the driving style to the trafficconditions. Watch traffic closely and activelyinterfere in the respective situations.◀

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/offOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. "Speed limit information"If speed limit detection is switched on, it canbe displayed on the info display in the instru‐ment cluster via the onboard computer.

DisplayThe following is displayed in the instrumentcluster:

Speed limit detectionCurrent speed limit.

Speed limit detection is notavailable.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed inthe Head-up Display.

Seite 102

Controls Displays


System limitsThe system may not be fully functional andmay provide incorrect information in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ When signs are concealed by objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield behind the interior

mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by asticker, etc.

▷ In the event of incorrect detection by thecamera.

▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigationsystem are incorrect.

▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐tem.

▷ When roads differ from the navigation,such as due to changes in road routing.

▷ When passing buses or trucks with aspeed sticker.

▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists in theinstrument clusterThe conceptDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the following can be displayed or operated us‐ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on thesteering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐strument cluster and the Head-up Display:▷ Current audio source.▷ Redial phone feature.▷ Turn on voice activation system.

Display

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,the list in the instrument cluster can differ fromthe illustration shown.

Activating a list and adjusting thesetting

On the right side of the steering wheel, turnthe thumbwheel to activate the correspondinglist.Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

Onboard computerIndication in the info display

The information from the on‐board computer is shown in theinfo display in the instrumentcluster.

Seite 103

Displays Controls


Calling up information on the infodisplay

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.Information is displayed in the info display ofthe instrument cluster.

Information at a glanceRepeatedly pressing the button on the turnsignal lever calls up the following information inthe info display:▷ Total range.▷ Range, electric.

With Max eDRIVE activated.▷ Average consumption, fuel.▷ Average consumption, electric.▷ Average consumption, fuel.▷ Current consumption, electric.▷ Average speed.▷ Date.▷ Speed limit detection.▷ Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Distance to destination.When destination guidance is activated inthe navigation system.

▷ Compass display in the navigation system.▷ Charging state of the high-voltage battery

as a percentage.

Selecting informationDepending on the vehicle equipment version,you can select what information from the on‐board computer is to be displayed on the infodisplay of the instrument cluster.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Instrument cluster"3. Select the desired information.

Information in detail

RangeDisplays the estimated cruising range availablewith the remaining fuel.It is calculated based on your driving style overthe last 20 miles/30 km.

Average fuel consumptionThe average fuel consumption is calculated forthe period while the engine is running.The average fuel consumption is calculated forthe distance traveled since the last reset by theonboard computer.

Average speedPeriods in which the vehicle is parked with theengine manually stopped are not included inthe calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.

Seite 104

Controls Displays


Distance to destinationThe distance remaining to the destination isdisplayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐gation system before the trip is started.The distance to the destination is adopted au‐tomatically.

Time of arrivalThe estimated time of arrival isdisplayed if a destination is en‐tered in the navigation systembefore the trip is started.The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detectionDescription of the speed limit detection, referto page 102, function.

CompassWith a navigation system: com‐pass display for the driving di‐rection.

Trip onboard computerThe vehicle features two types of onboardcomputers.▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as

often as necessary.▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip onboard computerOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Trip computer"3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are resetapprox. 4 hours after the vehicle came to astandstill.

Display on the Control DisplayDisplay the onboard computer or trip onboardcomputer on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption orspeedOn the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Onboard info"3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"4. "Yes"

Sport displaysThe conceptOn the Control Display, the current values forperformance and torque can be displayed ifthe vehicle is appropriately equipped.

Displaying sport displays on theControl Display1. "Vehicle info"2. "Sport displays"

Speed warningThe conceptDisplays a speed, when reached, should causea warning to be issued.The warning is repeated if the vehicle speeddrops below the set speed once by at least3 mph/5 km/h.

Seite 105

Displays Controls


Displaying, setting or changing thespeed warningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning at:"4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed

is displayed.5. Press the Controller.Speed warning is stored.

Activating/deactivating the speedwarningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Warning"4. Press the Controller.

Setting your current speed as thespeed warningOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Speed"3. "Select current speed"4. Press the Controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as thespeed warning.

Settings on the ControlDisplayTime

Setting the time zone1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:"4. Select the desired time zone.The time zone is stored.

Setting the time1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Time:"4. Turn the Controller until the desired hours

are displayed.5. Press the Controller.6. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐

nutes are displayed.7. Press the Controller.The time is stored.

Setting the time format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The time format is stored.

Automatic time settingDepending on your vehicle's optional features,the time, date and, if needed, the time zone areupdated automatically.

1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Auto time set"

Date

Setting the date1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Date:"4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is

displayed.

Seite 106

Controls Displays


5. Press the Controller.6. Make the necessary settings for the month

and year.The date is stored.

Setting the date format1. "Settings"2. "Time/Date"3. "Format:"4. Select the desired format.The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the languageTo set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. "Language:"4. Select the desired language.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Setting the voice dialogVoice dialog for the voice activation system,refer to page 28.

Units of measurement

Setting the units of measurementTo set the units for fuel consumption, route/distance and temperature:

1. "Settings"2. "Language/Units"3. Select the desired menu item.4. Select the desired unit.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Brightness

Setting the brightnessTo set the brightness of the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.5. Press the Controller.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ness settings may not be clearly visible.

Activating/deactivating display of thecurrent vehicle positionIf GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐rent vehicle position can be displayed in theBMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐tedDrive customer portal.

1. "Settings"2. "GPS tracking"3. "GPS tracking"

Head-up DisplayThe conceptThis system projects important informationinto the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.The driver can get information without avertinghis or her eyes from the road.

InformationFollow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display, refer to page 260.

Seite 107

Displays Controls


Overview

Display visibilityThe visibility of the displays in the Head-upDisplay is influenced by the following factors:▷ Certain sitting positions.▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐

play.▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.▷ Wet roads.▷ Unfavorable light conditions.If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐tings checked by a dealer’s service center oranother qualified service center or repair shop.

Switching on/off1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Head-Up Display"

Display

OverviewThe following information is displayed on theHead-up Display:▷ Speed.▷ Navigation system.▷ Check Control messages.▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.▷ Driver assistance systems.Some of this information is only displayedbriefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-upDisplayOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Displayed information"4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up

Display.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Setting the brightnessThe brightness is automatically adjusted to theambient brightness.The basic setting can be adjusted manually.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Brightness"4. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐

ness is set.5. Press the Controller.When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ally influenced using the instrument lighting.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Adjusting the heightOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Height"4. Turn the Controller until the desired height

is reached.5. Press the Controller.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Seite 108

Controls Displays


Setting the rotationThe screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐tated around its own axis.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Head-Up Display"3. "Rotation"4. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐

ting is selected.5. Press the Controller.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Special windshieldThe windshield is part of the system.The shape of the windshield makes it possibleto display a precise image.A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ages from being displayed.For this reason, it is strongly suggested tohave the special windshield replaced by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Seite 109

Displays Controls


LightsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

OverviewSwitches in the vehicle

The light switch elements is located next to thesteering wheel.

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights

Automatic headlight controlAdaptive Light Control

Lights offDaytime running lights

Symbol Function

Parking lights

Low beams

Instrument lighting

Parking lights, corneringlights and roadside parkinglightsGeneral informationPosition of switch: , , If the driver door is opened with the ignitionswitched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐cally switched off at these switch settings.

Parking lightsPosition of switch: The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐riods; otherwise, they might drain the batteryand it would then be impossible to start the en‐gine.When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐side parking lamp, refer to page 111.

Low beamsPosition of switch: The low beams light up when the ignition isswitched on.

Seite 110

Controls Lights


Roadside parking lights

The conceptThe vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With the ignition switched off, press the levereither up or down past the resistance point forapprox. 2 seconds.

Switching offBriefly press the lever to the resistance point inthe opposite direction.

Welcome lights andheadlight courtesy delayfeatureWelcome lights

General informationDepending on the equipment, when switchingoff the vehicle, switch position or .Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐ual light functions may be switched on briefly,when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivatingOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Welcome lights"

Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

General informationThe low beams stay lit for a short while if theheadlight flasher is switched on after the radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the durationOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Pathway lighting:"4. Set length of time.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Automatic headlight controlThe conceptThe low beams are switched on and off auto‐matically depending on the ambient bright‐ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or ifthere is precipitation.

General informationA blue sky with the sun low on the horizon cancause the lights to be switched on.When emerging from a tunnel during the day,the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.The low beams always stay on when the foglamp is switched on.

ActivatingPosition of switch: The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster isilluminated, when the low beams are switchedon.

Seite 111

Lights Controls


System limitsThe automatic headlamp control cannot serveas a substitute for your personal judgment oflighting conditions.E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog orhazy weather. To avoid safety risks underthese conditions, you should always switch onthe lights manually.

Daytime running lightsGeneral informationPosition of switch: , , The daytime running lights light up when theignition is switched on. After the ignition isswitched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐tion .

Activating/deactivatingIn some countries, daytime running lights aremandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐vate the daytime running lights.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Daytime running lamps"Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Adaptive Light ControlThe conceptAdaptive Light Control is a variable headlightcontrol system that enables dynamic illumina‐tion of the road surface.

General informationDepending on the steering angle and other pa‐rameters, the light from the headlight followsthe course of the road.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐tive Light Control consists of one or severalsystems:▷ Cornering light, refer to page 112.▷ Adaptive headlight range control, refer to

page 112.

ActivatingPosition of switch with the ignitionswitched on.

Corner-illuminating lightsIn tight curves, for example, on mountainousroads or when turning, an additional, corner-il‐luminating lamp is switched on that lights upthe inside of the curve when the vehicle ismoving below a certain speed.The turning lights are automatically switchedon depending on the steering angle or the useof turn signals.When driving in reverse, the turning lights maybe automatically switched on regardless of thesteering angle.

Self-leveling headlightsThe self-leveling headlights compensate foracceleration and braking operations in ordernot to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieveoptimum illumination of the roadway.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or hasfailed. Have the system immediately checkedby a dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

Seite 112

Controls Lights


High-beam AssistantThe conceptThe high-beam Assistant detects other trafficparticipants early on and automaticallyswitches the high beams on or off dependingon the traffic situation. The assistant ensuresthat the high beams are switched on, when‐ever the traffic situation allows. In the lowspeed range, the high beams are not switchedon by the system.

General informationThe system responds to light from oncomingtraffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and toadequate illumination, for example, in townsand cities.The driver can intervene at any time and switchthe high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

1. Depending on the equipment, turn the lightswitch into position or .

2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐row.

The indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐tomatically brightened or dimmed.

The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster lights up when the systemswitches on the high beams.

DeactivatingThe High-beam Assistant is deactivated whenmanually switching the high beams on and off,refer to page 82. To reactivate the High-beamAssistant, press the button on the turn signallever.

System limitsThe High-beam Assistant cannot serve as asubstitute for the driver's personal judgment ofwhen to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐ually switch off the high beams in situationswhere required to avoid a safety risk.The system is not fully functional in the follow‐ing situations, and driver intervention may benecessary:▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,

such as fog or heavy precipitation.▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such

as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback ridersand wagons; when driving close to train orship traffic; and at animal crossings.

▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐coming traffic on highways.

▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in thepresence of highly reflective signs.

▷ When the windshield behind the interiormirror is fogged over, dirty or covered withstickers, etc.

Fog lightsFront fog lightsThe low beams must be switched on.

Press button. The green indicatorlamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer topage 111, is activated, the low beams willcome on automatically when you switch on thefront fog lights.

Seite 113

Lights Controls


When the high beams or headlight flasher areactivated, the front fog lights are not switchedon.

Instrument lightingAdjusting

The parking lights or low beamsmust be switched on to adjustthe brightness.Adjust the brightness with thethumbwheel.

Interior lightsGeneral informationThe interior lights, footwell lights, the accesslights and the courtesy lights are controlled au‐tomatically.Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐trols brightness of some of these features.

Overview

1 Interior lights2 Reading lights

Switching the interior lights on and offPress button.

To switch off permanently: press the button forapprox. 3 seconds.

Switch back on: press button.

Switching the reading lamps on andoff manually

Press button.

Reading lights are located at the front and rearnext to the interior lights.

Ambient lightDepending on your optional features lightingcan be adjusted for some lights in the interior.

Selecting color schemeOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Lighting design"4. Select desired setting.To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".

Setting the brightnessOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Lighting"3. "Brightness:"4. Adjust the brightness.

Seite 114

Controls Lights


SafetyVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver2 Front airbag, front passenger3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag5 Knee airbag

Front airbagsFront airbags help protect the driver and frontpassenger by responding to frontal impacts inwhich safety belts alone would not provide ad‐equate restraint.

Side airbagIn a lateral impact, the side airbag supports theside of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbagIn a lateral impact, the head airbag supportsthe head.

Seite 115

Safety Controls


Ejection MitigationThe head airbag system is designed as anejection mitigation countermeasure to reducethe likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupantsthrough side windows during rollovers or sideimpact events.

Knee airbagThe knee airbag supports the legs in a frontalimpact.

Protective actionAirbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐tion, for example, in less severe accidents orrear-end collisions.

Information for optimum effect of theairbags

WARNINGIf the seat position is incorrect or the de‐

ployment area of the airbags is impacted, theairbag system cannot protect as intended orcause additional injuries due to triggering.There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐serve the hints for optimum protective effect ofthe airbag system.◀

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads

away from the side airbag.▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keepthe risk of injury to your hands or arms aslow as possible when the airbag is trig‐gered.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet andlegs in the floor area and does not supportthem on the dashboard.

▷ There should be no persons, animals orobjects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐bag cover panels, do not cover them ormodify them in any way.

▷ Dashboard and windshield on the frontpassenger side must stay clear - do not at‐tach adhesive labels or coverings and donot attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPSdevices or' mobile phones.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag onthe front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions orother objects on the front passenger seatthat are not specifically suited for seatswith integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such asjackets, over the backrests.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐nents or the wiring in the airbag system.This also applies to steering wheel covers,the dashboard, and the seats.

▷ Do not remove the airbag system.Even when you follow all instructions veryclosely, injury from contact with the airbagscannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.The ignition and inflation noise may lead toshort-term and, in most cases, temporaryhearing impairment in sensitive individuals.Warnings and information on the airbags arealso found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbagsystem

InformationWARNINGIndividual components can be hot after

triggering of the airbag system. There is risk ofinjuries. Do not touch individual components.◀

WARNINGImproperly executed work can lead to

failure, malfunction or unintentional triggeringof the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐

Seite 116

Controls Safety


tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐tended in the event of an accident despite re‐spective accident severity. There is risk ofinjuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ped by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.◀

Correct functionWhen the ignition is switched on, thewarning lamp in the instrument clusterlights up briefly and thereby indicates

the operational readiness of the entire airbagsystem and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the

ignition is turned on.▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

The conceptThe system reads if the front passenger seat isoccupied by measuring the human body's re‐sistance.Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐senger's side are either activated or deacti‐vated.

InformationBefore transporting a child on the front pas‐senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐structions for children on the front passengerseat, see Children.

WARNINGThe ensure the front-seat passenger air‐

bag function, it must be detected, whether aperson occupies the front passenger seat. Theentire seat cushion area must be used for thispurpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to

life. Make sure that the front passenger keepshis or her feet in the floor area.◀

Malfunction of the automaticdeactivation systemWhen transporting older children and adults,the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,the indicator lamp for the front-seat passengerairbags lights up.In this case, change the sitting position so thatthe front-seat passenger airbags are activatedand the indicator lamp goes out.If it is not possible to activate the airbags, havethe person sit in the rear.To enable correct recognition of the occupiedseat cushion.▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

or other items to the front passenger seatunless they are specifically determined tobe safe for use on the front passengerseat.

▷ Do not place any electronic devices on thepassenger seat if a child restraint system isto be installed on it.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat thatcould press against the seat from below.

▷ No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front-seatpassenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ger airbags indicates the operating state of thefront-seat passenger airbags.

Seite 117

Safety Controls


The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ther activated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights upwhen a child is properlyseated in a child restraint fix‐ing system or when the seatis empty. The airbags on thefront passenger side are notactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,for example, a correctly seated person ofsufficient size is detected on the seat. Theairbags on the front passenger side are ac‐tivated.

Detected child seatsThe system generally detects children seatedin a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐factured. After installing a child seat, makesure that the indicator lamp for the front-seatpassenger airbags lights up. This indicatesthat the child seat has been detected and thefront-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seatpassenger airbagThe explosive power that activates driver's/front passenger's airbags very much dependson the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐er's seat.With a respective message appearing on Con‐trol Display calibrate the front seats to keepthe accuracy of this function over the long-term.

Calibrating the front seatsWARNINGThere is risk of jamming when moving


A corresponding message appears on theControl Display.

1. Press the switch and move the respectiveseat all the way forward.

2. Press the switch forward again. The seatstill moves forward slightly.

3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.The calibration procedure is completed whenthe message on the Control Display disap‐pears.If the message continues to be displayed, re‐peat the calibration.If the message does not disappear after a re‐peat calibration, have the system checked assoon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPMThe conceptThe system monitors tire inflation pressure inthe four mounted tires. The system warns youif there is a significant loss of pressure in oneor more tires. For this purpose, sensors in thetire valves measure the tire inflation pressureand tire temperature.

InformationWith use of the system observe further infor‐mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐fer to page 223.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been reset with thecorrect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss isnot assured.Reset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.Always use wheels with TPM electronics toensure that the system will operate properly.

Seite 118

Controls Safety


Status displayThe current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐play, for example, whether or not the TPM isactive.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"The status is displayed.

Status control displayTire and system status are indicated by thecolor of the wheels and a text message on theControl Display.

All wheels greenSystem is active and will issue a warning rela‐tive to the tire inflation pressures stored duringthe last reset.

One wheel is yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inthe indicated tire.

All wheels are yellowA flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure inseveral tires.

Wheels, grayThe system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasonsfor this may be:▷ The system is being reset.▷ Malfunction.

Status informationThe status control display additionally showsthe current tire inflation pressures and, de‐pending on the model, tire temperatures. Itshows the actual values read; they may varydepending on driving style or weather condi‐tions.

Carry out resetReset the system after each adjustment of thetire inflation pressure and after every tire orwheel change.On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Switch on drive readiness – do not drive

off.5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform

reset".6. Drive away.The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐tus is displayed.After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for ashort period, the set tire inflation pressures areaccepted as reference values. The reset iscompleted automatically while driving.The progress of the reset is displayed.After a successfully completed Reset, thewheels on the Control Display are shown ingreen and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)active" is displayed.You may interrupt this trip at any time. Whenyou continue the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure messageThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in

tire inflation pressure.▷ No reset was performed for the system.

The system therefore issues a warningbased on the tire inflation pressures beforethe last reset.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.

Seite 119

Safety Controls


Run-flat tires, refer to page 229, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

WARNINGA damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There isrisk of an accident. Do not continue driving ifthe vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.Observe the hints on run-flat tires and contin‐ued driving with these tires.◀

A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSCDynamic Stability Control.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 229, can possibly beused for this purpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis shown to be correct, it is possible thatthe Tire Pressure Monitor did not performa reset. Then perform the reset.If identification of flat tire damage is notpossible, please contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service centeror repair shop.

2. Fix the flat tire, possibly using the MobilitySystem, refer to page 229.

Use of tire sealant, for example, the MobilitySystem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐ics. In this case, have the electronics checkedat the next opportunity and have them re‐placed if needed.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou may continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis shown to be correct, it is possible thatthe Tire Pressure Monitor did not performa reset. Then perform the reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ing style and road conditions.A vehicle with an average load has a possibledriving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ently, for example, it has reduced lane stabilityduring braking, a longer braking distance anddifferent self-steering properties. Adjust yourdriving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers or driving over obstacles, for exam‐ple, curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

WARNINGYour vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missingtire inflation pressure, for example, your lanestability is reduced when braking, braking dis‐

Seite 120

Controls Safety


tances are longer and the self-steering proper‐ties will change. There is risk of an accident.Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐cate the final failure of a tire.Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci‐dent.Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Required tire inflation pressure checkmessageA Check Control message is displayed in thefollowing situations▷ The system has detected a wheel change,

but no reset was done.▷ Inflation was not carried out according to

specifications.▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below

the level of the last confirmation.In this case:▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as

needed.▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire

change.

System limitsThe system does not function properly if a re‐set has not been carried out, for example, a flattire is reported though tire inflation pressuresare correct.The tire inflation pressure depends on thetire's temperature. Driving or exposure to thesun will increase the tire's temperature, thusincreasing the tire inflation pressure. The tireinflation pressure is reduced when the tiretemperature falls again. These circumstances

may cause a warning when temperatures fallvery sharply.The system cannot indicate sudden serioustire damage caused by external circumstances.

MalfunctionThe yellow warning lamp flashes andthen lights up continuously. A CheckControl message is displayed. No flat

tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐tected.

Examples and recommendations in the follow‐ing situations:▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted. If necessary, have it checked bya dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.Reset the system again.

▷ Interference through systems or deviceswith the same radio frequency: After leav‐ing the area of the interference, the systemautomatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure MonitoringSystemEach tire, including the spare (if provided)should be checked monthly when cold and in‐flated to the inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐sure telltale when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

Seite 121

Safety Controls


the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stopping ability. Pleasenote that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMS lowtire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has alsobeen equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐tor is combined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐tion, the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illumi‐nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐function exists. When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of replace‐ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐tale after replacing one or more tires or wheelson your vehicle to ensure that the replacementor alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire MonitorThe conceptThe system detects tire inflation pressure losson the basis of rotation speed differences be‐tween the individual wheels while driving.In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, thediameter and therefore the rotational speed of

the corresponding wheel changes. This will bedetected and reported as a flat tire.The system does not measure the actual infla‐tion pressure in the tires.

Functional requirementsThe system must have been initialized whenthe tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐tion of the tire inflation pressure and afterevery tire or wheel change.

Status displayThe current status of the Flat Tire Monitor canbe displayed on the Control Display, for exam‐ple, whether or not the FTM is active.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"The status is displayed.

InitializationWhen initializing the once set inflation tirepressures serve as reference values in order todetect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐firming the tire inflation pressures.Do not initialize the system when driving withsnow chains.On the Control Display:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Perform reset"4. Switch on drive readiness – do not drive

off.5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".6. Drive away.The initialization is completed while driving,which can be interrupted at any time.

Seite 122

Controls Safety


The initialization automatically continues whendriving resumes.

Indication of a flat tireThe yellow warning lamp lights up. ACheck Control message is displayed.There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire

inflation pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted withnormal tires or run-flat tires.Run-flat tires, refer to page 229, are la‐beled with a circular symbol containing theletters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

WARNINGA damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There isrisk of an accident. Do not continue driving ifthe vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.Observe the hints on run-flat tires and contin‐ued driving with these tires.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐bility Control is switched on if needed.

System limitsA natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in allfour tires will not be recognized. Therefore,check the tire inflation pressure regularly.Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐vance.The system could be delayed or malfunction inthe following situations:▷ When the system has not been initialized.▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.

▷ Sporty driving style: spinning tractionwheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in allfour tires.The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐tem, refer to page 229, can possibly beused for this purpose.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.If identification of flat tire damage is notpossible, please contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service centeror repair shop.

2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using theMobility System, refer to page 229.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speedYou may continue driving with a damaged tireat speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tireIf continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at

the next opportunity.If the tire inflation pressure in all four tiresis correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may nothave been initialized. In this case, initializethe system.

Seite 123

Safety Controls


Possible driving distance with complete loss oftire inflation pressure:The possible driving distance after a loss of tireinflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ing style and road conditions.A vehicle with an average load has a possibledriving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ently, for example, it has reduced lane stabilityduring braking, a longer braking distance anddifferent self-steering properties. Adjust yourdriving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steeringmaneuvers or driving over obstacles, for exam‐ple, curbs, potholes, etc.Because the possible driving distance de‐pends on how the vehicle is used during thetrip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

WARNINGYour vehicle handles differently when a

run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missingtire inflation pressure, for example, your lanestability is reduced when braking, braking dis‐tances are longer and the self-steering proper‐ties will change. There is risk of an accident.Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of50 mph/80 km/h.◀

Final tire failureVibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐cate the final failure of a tire.Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces ofthe tire could come loose and cause an acci‐dent.Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Intelligent SafetyThe conceptIntelligent Safety enables central operation ofthe driver assistance system. Depending onhow the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safetyconsists of one or more systems that can helpprevent a imminent collision.▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to

page 125.▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 131.▷ Lane departure warning, refer to

page 138.▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to

page 140.

InformationWARNINGIndicators and warnings do not relieve

from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐tem limits, warnings or reactions of the systemmay not be output or they may be output toolate or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐fere in the respective situations.◀

WARNINGDue to system limits, individual functions

can malfunction during tow-starting/towingwith the Intelligent Safety systems activated,for example approach control warning withlight braking function. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems offprior to tow-starting/towing.◀

Seite 124

Controls Safety


Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/offSome Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐gent Safety systems activate according to thelast setting.

Press button briefly:▷ The menu for the intelligent safety

system is displayed. The systemsare individually switched off ac‐cording to their respective set‐tings.

▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐tive to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. Individual settings arestored for the profile currently used.

Press button again:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are

activated.▷ The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are

turned off.▷ The LED goes out.

Front-end collision warningDepending on the equipment, the collisionwarning system consists of one of the follow‐ing functions:▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐

ing function, refer to page 125.▷ Front-end collision warning with braking

function, refer to page 128

Front-end collision warningwith City Braking functionThe conceptThe system can help prevent accidents. If anaccident cannot be prevented, the system willhelp reduce the collision speed.The system sounds a warning before an immi‐nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ently if needed.The automatic braking intervention is donewith limited force and duration.A camera in the area of the rearview mirrorcontrols the system.The front-end collision warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.With the vehicle approaching another vehicleintentionally, the collision warning and brakingare delayed in order to avoid false system re‐actions.

General informationThe system warns at two levels of an imminentdanger of collision at speeds from approx.3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary withthe current driving situation.Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to35 mph/60 km/h.

Seite 125

Safety Controls


Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected bythe system.





Overview



Camera


Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe system is automatically active after everydriving-off.

Switching on/off manuallyPress button briefly:▷ The menu for the intelligent safety


Seite 126

Controls Safety








Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐rently used.

Warning with braking function

DisplayIf a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning.You are requested to intervene bybraking or make an evasive maneu‐ver.

PrewarningThis warning is issued, for example, whenthere is the impending danger of a collision orthe distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.The driver must intervene actively when thereis a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking functionAcute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐proaches another object at a high differentialspeed.The driver must intervene actively when thereis an acute warning. If necessary, the driver isassisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐vention in a possible risk of collision.Acute warnings can also be triggered withoutprevious forewarning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withsome braking intervention if there is risk of acollision. At low speeds vehicles may thuscome to a complete stop.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is not acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

Seite 127

Safety Controls


System limits

InformationWARNINGThe system can react incorrectly or not

at all due to the system limits. There is risk ofaccidents or risk of property damage. Observethe system limits and actively interfere ifneeded.◀

Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.Thus a system reaction might not come ormight come late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSCOFF.

▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipmentversion, the field of view of the camera inthe mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐gine, via the Start/Stop button.

▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ately after vehicle delivery.

▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sunlow in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settings are,for example the warning time, the more warn‐ings are displayed. However, there may also bean excess of false warnings.

Collision warning withbraking functionThe conceptThe system can help prevent accidents. If anaccident cannot be prevented, the system willhelp reduce the collision speed.The system sounds a warning before an immi‐nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ently if needed.The automatic braking intervention may beexecuted with maximum braking force and fora brief period only as necessary.If the vehicle is equipped with Active CruiseControl with Stop & Go, the front-end collisionwarning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐dar sensor in conjunction with a camera.The front-end collision warning is availableeven if cruise control has been deactivated.With the vehicle approaching another vehicleintentionally, the collision warning and brakingare delayed in order to avoid false system re‐actions.

General informationThe system issues a two-phase warning of apossible danger of collision with vehicles atspeeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time ofwarnings may vary with the current driving sit‐uation.

Seite 128

Controls Safety


Detection range

It responds to objects if they are detected bythe system.





Overview



Radar sensor

The radar sensor is located in the lower area ofthe front bumper.Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐structed.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Seite 129

Safety Controls


Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐terior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off










Setting the warning timeThe warning time can be set via iDrive.

1. "Settings"2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"3. Activate the desired time on the Control

Display.The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐rently used.


DisplayIf a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acousticsignal sounds: acute warning.You are requested to intervene bybraking or make an evasive maneu‐ver.

PrewarningThis warning is issued, for example, whenthere is the impending danger of a collision orthe distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.The driver must intervene actively when thereis a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking functionAcute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐proaches another object at a high differentialspeed.The driver must intervene actively when thereis an acute warning. If necessary, the driver isassisted by an automatic braking interventionin a possible risk of collision.Acute warnings can also be triggered withoutprevious forewarning.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withautomatic braking intervention if there is risk of

Seite 130

Controls Safety


a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐cle to a complete stop.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is not acti‐vated.Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the brakingintervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.No automatic delay occurs.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

System limits



Detection rangeThe system's detection potential is limited.Thus a system reaction might not come ormight come late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach

them at high speed.▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of

you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐fall.

▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

limited or deactivated, for example, DSCOFF.

▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipmentversion, the field of view of the camera inthe mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐scured.

▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐gine, via the Start/Stop button.


▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sunlow in the sky.

Warning sensitivityThe more sensitive the warning settings are,for example the warning time, the more warn‐ings are displayed. However, there may also bean excess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warningDepending on how the vehicle is equipped, thefunction warns of an imminent collision withpedestrians during daytime or nighttime.The function is subdivided into the followingsystems:▷ During daytime: Person warning with City

light braking function, refer to page 131▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 134

Person warning with Citylight braking functionThe conceptThe system can help prevent accidents withpedestrians.

Seite 131

Safety Controls


The system issues a warning in the city drivingspeed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐lision with pedestrians and includes a brakingfunction.The camera in the area of the rearview mirrorcontrols the system.

General informationWith sufficient brightness, the system warnsabout possible collision danger with pedes‐trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with brakingbefore a collision.Under those circumstances it reacts to peoplewho are within the detection range of the sys‐tem.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ided into two areas▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐cated within the central area. A warning is is‐sued about pedestrians who are located withinthe extended area only if they are moving inthe direction of the central area.





Overview



Seite 132

Controls Safety


Camera


Switching on/off











DisplayIf a collision with a person detected in this wayis imminent, a warning symbol appears on theinstrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐nal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make anevasive maneuver.

Braking interventionThe warning prompts the driver himself/herselfto react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping onthe brake pedal. The system can assist withsome braking intervention if there is risk of acollision. At low speeds vehicles may thuscome to a complete stop.The braking intervention is executed only ifDSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched onand Dynamic Traction Control DTC is not acti‐vated.The braking intervention can be interrupted bystepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐tively moving the steering wheel.Object detection can be restricted. Limitationsof the detection range and functional restric‐tions are to be considered.

System limits



Seite 133

Safety Controls


Detection rangeThe detection potential of the camera is lim‐ited.Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐sued late.E. g. the following situations may not be de‐tected:▷ Partially covered pedestrians.▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such

because of the viewing angle or contour.▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than

32 inches/80 cm.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional or maynot be available in the following situations:The system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

fall.▷ In tight curves.▷ If the driving stability control systems are

deactivated, for example DSC OFF.▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front

windshield are dirty or covered.▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐

gine, via the Start/Stop button.▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle delivery.▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐

cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sunlow in the sky.

▷ When it is dark outside.

Night Vision with Pedestrianand Animal DetectionThe conceptNight Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐tion is a night vision system.An infrared camera scans the area in front ofthe vehicle and issues a warning if it detectspedestrians and animals on the street. Warmobjects that are similar in shape to human be‐ings or animals are detected by the system. Ifnecessary, the heat image can be displayed onthe Control Display.

Heat image

The image shows the heat radiated by objectsin the field of view of the camera.Warm objects have a light appearance andcold objects a dark appearance.The ability to detect an object depends on thetemperature difference between the objectand the background and on the level of heatradiation emitted by the object. Objects thatare similar in temperature to the environmentor that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐tect.

For safety reasons, when driving at speedsabove approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐ent light, the image is only displayed when thelow beams are activated.A still image is displayed at regular intervals fora fraction of a second.

Seite 134

Controls Safety


Pedestrian and animal detection

Object detection and warning only functions indarkness.Objects whose form is similar to people withsufficient heat radiation are detected.In addition, the system also detects animalsabove a certain minimum size, for example,deer.Display on the Control Display with heat imageactivated:▷ People detected by the system: in light

yellow.▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark

yellow.

Range of object detection, with good ambientconditions:▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.

330 ft/100 m▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.

490 ft/150 m▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐

prox. 230 ft/70 mEnvironmental influences can limit the availa‐bility of object detection.If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle islocated in a residential area, the animal detec‐tion is temporarily switched off.



Overview

Buttons in the vehicle


Switching on/switching off heat image

Seite 135

Safety Controls


Camera

The camera is automatically heated when theexternal temperatures are low.The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐gether with the headlights.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWhen it is dark outside, the system is automat‐ically active after every driving-off.









Switching on heat image additionallyThe heat image from the Night Vision cameracan also be displayed on the Control Display.This function has no effect on object detec‐tion.

Press button.

The image from the camera is displayed on theControl Display.

Adjustments via the iDriveWith heat image switched on:

1. Press the Controller.2. Select brightness or contrast.

▷ Select the symbol.▷ Select the symbol.

3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ting is selected.


Display

Warning of people or animals indangerIf a collision with a person or an animal de‐tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐bol appears on the instrument cluster and inthe Head-up Display.Although both the shape and the heat radiationare analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruledout.

Seite 136

Controls Safety


Warning area in front of the vehicle

The warning area for the pedestrian warningconsists of two parts:▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

vehicle.▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and

left.With animal warnings, no distinction is madebetween the central or expanded area.The entire area moves along with the vehicle inthe direction of the steering angle and changeswith the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speedincreases, the area becomes longer and wider,for example.

PrewarningThe yellow symbol is displayed when aperson is detected in the central areaimmediately in front of the vehicle.

The yellow symbol is displayed when a personin the extended area is moving from the rightor left towards the central area.The displayed symbol can vary with the peopledetected.Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐sive maneuver.

When animals are detected, an animalsymbol is displayed. The symbol alsoshows the side of the road on which

the animal was detected. Intervene actively bybraking or make an evasive maneuver.

Acute warningThe red symbol is displayed and a sig‐nal sounds.

When animals are detected, an red animalsymbol is displayed with the signal tone.

Red symbol in the instrument cluster.

Intervene immediately by braking or make anevasive maneuver.

Display in the Head-up DisplayThe warning is displayed simultane‐ously in the Head-up Display and onthe instrument cluster. The displayed

symbol can vary with the people detected.When animals are detected, an animal symbolis displayed.

System limits

Basic limitsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in

tight curves.▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective

glass is damaged.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ At very high external temperatures.

Limits of pedestrian and animaldetectionIn some situations, it may occur that pedes‐trians are detected as animals or animals aspedestrians.Small animals are not detected by the objectdetection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ble in the image.Limited detection, for example in the followingcircumstances:

Seite 137

Safety Controls


▷ People or animals who are fully or partiallycovered, especially when their heads arecovered.

▷ People who are not in an upright position,for example, lying down.

▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (forexample, recumbent bicycles).

▷ After physical damage to the system, forexample, after an accident.

No display on the rear screenThe image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐played on the rear screen.

Lane departure warningThe conceptStarting at a specific speed, this system alertsyou when the vehicle on streets with lanemarkings is about to leave the lane. Thisspeed, depending on the country version, isbetween 35 mph/55 km/h and45 mph/70 km/h.The steering wheel begins vibrating gently inthe event of warnings. The time of the warningmay vary depending on the current driving sit‐uation.The system does not provide a warning if theturn signal is set before leaving the lane.


personal responsibility to correctly assessroute and traffic situation. There is risk of anaccident. Adjust the driving style to the trafficconditions. Watch traffic closely and activelyinterfere in the respective situations. In theevent of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerkthe steering wheel.◀

Overview



Camera


Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe lane departure warning is automaticallyactivated after departure, if the function wasswitched on the last time the engine was stop‐ped.


system is displayed. The systemsare individually switched off ac‐

Seite 138

Controls Safety


cording to their respective set‐tings.







Display in the instrument cluster▷ Lines: system is activated.▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking

was detected and warnings can beissued.

Issued warningIf you leave the lane and if a lane marking hasbeen detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐brating.If the turn signal is set before changing thelane, a warning is not issued.

End of warningThe warning is canceled in the following situa‐tions:▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.▷ When returning to your own lane.▷ When braking hard.▷ When using the turn signal.

System limits



Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐

ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lanemarkings such as in construction areas.

▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,ice, dirt or water.

▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ When the lane markings are covered by

objects.▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in

front of you.▷ When driving toward bright lights.▷ When the windshield in front of the interior

mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered withstickers, etc.


Seite 139

Safety Controls


Active Blind Spot DetectionThe concept

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitorthe area behind and next to the vehicle atspeeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.

The system indicates whether there are vehi‐cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approachingfrom behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐med.Before you change lanes after setting the turnsignal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐uations described above.The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashesand the steering wheel vibrates.



Overview



Radar sensors

The radar sensors are located in the rearbumper.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyThe Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐cally activated after departure, if the functionwas switched on the last time the engine wasstopped.



Seite 140

Controls Safety








Display

Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

Information stageThe dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ing indicates when there are vehicles in theblind spot or approaching from behind.

WARNINGIf the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in thecritical zone, the steering wheel vibrates brieflyand the lamp in the exterior mirror housingflashes brightly.The warning stops when the turn signal isswitched off, or the other vehicle leaves thecritical zone.

Brief flashingA brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐locking serves as system self-test.

System limits



Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

much faster than your own.▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered

with stickers.▷ If cargo protrudes.A Check Control message is displayed whenthe system is not fully functional.

For US owners onlyThe transmitter and receiver units comply withpart 15 of the FCC/Federal CommunicationCommission regulations. Operation is gov‐erned by the following:FCC ID:▷ NBG009014A.Compliance statement:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐

ference, and

Seite 141

Safety Controls


▷ this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes tothese devices could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

Brake force displayThe concept

▷ During normal brake application, the outerand inner top brake lamps light up.

▷ During heavy brake application, the innerlower brake lamps light up in addition.

Active ProtectionGeneral informationThe Active Protection safety package consistsof systems that are independent of each other:▷ Attentiveness assistant.▷ PreCrash.▷ PostCrash.

Attentiveness assistant

The conceptThe system can detect decreasing alertness orfatigue of the driver during long, monotonoustrips, for example, on highways. In this situa‐tion, it is recommended that the driver takes abreak.


personal responsibility to correctly assessone's physical state. An increasing lack ofalertness or fatigue may not be detected or notbe detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Make sure that the driver is rested andalert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐ditions.◀

FunctionThe system is activated each time the engineis started and cannot be switched off.After travel has begun, the system is trainedabout the driver, so that decreasing alertnessor fatigue can be detected.This procedure takes the following criteria intoaccount:▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐

ing behavior.▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of

trip.Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, thesystem is active and can display a recommen‐dation to take a break.

Break recommendationIf the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, amessage is displayed in the Control Displaywith the recommendation to take a break.A recommendation to take a break is displayedonly once during an uninterrupted trip.After a break, another recommendation to takea break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐mately 45 minutes.

System limitsThe function may be limited in the followingsituations, for instance, and will either outputan incorrect warning or no warning at all:▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

Seite 142

Controls Safety


▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly belowabout 43 mph/70 km/h.

▷ With a sporty driving style, such as duringrapid acceleration or when cornering fast.

▷ In active driving situations, such as whenchanging lanes frequently.

▷ When the road surface is poor.▷ In the event of strong side winds.

PreCrash

The conceptWith this system critical driving situations thatmight result in an accident can be detectedabove a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Inthese situations, preventive measures are au‐tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐cident as much as possible.Critical driving situations may include:▷ Emergency stop.▷ Severe understeering.▷ Severe oversteering.If the vehicle includes the front-end collisionwarning or front-end collision warning withbraking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐cles driving ahead or stopped in front of youcan also be detected within the system'srange.


personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐ably or in time. There is risk of an accident. Ad‐just the driving style to the traffic conditions.Watch traffic closely and actively interfere inthe respective situations.◀

FunctionAfter the safety belt is buckled, the front safetybelts are automatically tightened once after thevehicle drove off.In critical driving situations, the following indi‐vidual functions become active as needed:▷ The front safety belts are automatically

pretensioned.▷ Automatic closing of the windows.▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:

automatic positioning of the backrest forthe front passenger seat.

After a critical driving situation without an acci‐dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.All other systems can be restored to the de‐sired setting.If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safetybelt using the red button in the buckle. Fastenthe safety belt before continuing on your trip.

PostCrashIn the event of an accident, the system canbring the car to a halt automatically without in‐tervention by the driver in certain situations.This can reduce the risk of a further collisionand the consequences thereof.Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automaticbraking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐terrupts automatic braking.After coming to a halt, the brake is releasedautomatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ing.

Seite 143

Safety Controls


Driving stability control systemsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Anti-lock Braking SystemABSABS prevents locking of the wheels duringbraking.The vehicle contains its steering power evenduring full brake applications, thus increasingactive safety.ABS is operational every time you start the en‐gine.

Brake assistantWhen you apply the brakes rapidly, this systemautomatically produces the greatest possiblebraking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐tance to a minimum during emergency stop.This system utilizes all of the benefits providedby ABS.Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedalfor the duration of the emergency stop.

Adaptive brake assistantIn combination with the Active Cruise Control,this system ensures that the brakes respondeven more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐uations.

Drive-off assistantThe conceptThis system supports driving off on inclines.The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐

out delay.After the foot brake is released, the vehicle isheld in place for approx. 2 seconds.Depending on the vehicle load or when a traileris used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

Automatic Differential BrakeThe system controls the driving force by auto‐matic braking intervention on individualwheels. The function corresponds to a differ‐ential lock: the system detects if a wheel be‐gins to spin, because of loose road surface, forexample, and automatically brakes it.The driving force is diverted to the wheel withbetter traction.As a result, the engine force is transferredmore efficiently to the wheels during accelera‐tions.

DSC Dynamic StabilityControlThe conceptDynamic Stability Control detect for examplethe following unstable driving conditions:▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.

Seite 144

Controls Driving stability control systems


▷ Loss of traction of the front wheel, whichcan lead to understeering.

Within the physical limits, the system helps tokeep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐ing engine speed and by applying brakes tothe individual wheels.

InformationThe system does not relieve the driver from hisresponsibility to adjust his driving style accord‐ing to the situation.Therefore, adjust the driving style according tothe situation and do not reduce the additionalsafety margin by driving in a risky manner.

WARNINGWhen driving with roof load, for example

with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safetymay not be ensured in driving-critical situa‐tions due to the elevated center of gravity.There is risk of accidents or risk of propertydamage. Do not deactivate Dynamic StabilityControl DSC when driving with roof load.◀

Overview


DSC OFF button

Indicator/warning lightsThe indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐trols the drive and braking forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFFWhen DSC is deactivated, driving stability isreduced during acceleration and when drivingin curves.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSCPress and hold this button but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.DSC is switched off.The steering and, depending on the equip‐ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

Activating DSCPress button.DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC isdeactivated.

DTC Dynamic TractionControlThe conceptDTC is a version of the DSC where forwardmomentum is optimized.The system ensures maximum headway onspecial road conditions or loose road surfaces,for example unplowed snowy roads, but withsomewhat limited driving stability.

Seite 145

Driving stability control systems Controls


When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐mum traction. Driving stability is limited duringacceleration and when driving in curves.Therefore drive with appropriate caution.You may find it useful to briefly activate DTCunder the following special circumstances:▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,

snow-covered roads.▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or

driving off from loose grounds.▷ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC DynamicTraction Control

Activating DTCPress button.TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSCOFF lights up.

Deactivating DTCPress button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐

tor lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lightsIf DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed inthe instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrivexDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSCfurther optimize traction and driving dynamics.The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐tributes the drive forces to the front and rearaxles as demanded by the driving situation androad surface.

Display on the Control Display

Displaying xDrive view1. "Vehicle info"2. "xDrive status"3. "xDrive view"The following information is displayed:▷ With a navigation system: compass display

for the driving direction▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage.▷ Transverse gradient with degree indica‐

tion.▷ Graphic display for the steering.

HDC Hill Descent ControlThe conceptHDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐matically controls vehicle speed on steepdownhill gradients. Without applying thebrakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more thanwalking speed. It the brakes are actively ap‐plied, the system distributes force according tothe traction.Vehicle stability and maneuverability are im‐proved on downhill gradients.Hill Descent Control can be activated atspeeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Whendriving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speedand then keeps its speed constant.Only use HDC in low gears or in selector leverposition D or R.

Increasing or decreasing vehiclespeedSpecify desired speed in the range from ap‐prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/husing the rocker switch of the cruise control onthe steering wheel. Vehicle speed can bechanged by lightly accelerating.

Seite 146



▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point ofresistance: the speed increases gradually.

▷ Press up the rocker switch past the pointof resistance: the speed increases whilethe rocker switch is pressed.

▷ Press the rocker switch down to the pointof resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐ally.

▷ Press the rocker switch down past thepoint of resistance: when driving forward,the speed decreases to approx.6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speeddecreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.

Activating HDC

Press button; the LED above the buttonlights up.

Deactivating HDCPress button again. The LED goes out.HDC is automatically deactivated above

approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Display in the instrument clusterThe selected speed is displayedin the speedometer.▷ Green: the system is actively

braking the vehicle.▷ Orange: the system is on

standby.

MalfunctionA message is displayed in the instrument clus‐ter. HDC is not available, for example, due toelevated brake temperatures.

Vertical Dynamic ControlThe conceptThis system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐eling on uneven road surfaces.The system enhances driving dynamics andcomfort fitting road surface and driving style.

ProgramsThe system offers several different programs.Select the programs via the Driving DynamicsControl, refer to page 148.

SPORT/SPORT+Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐sorbers for greater driving agility.

COMFORT/ECO PROBalanced tuning.

Self-leveling suspensionThe conceptThe self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicleheight and ground clearance constant. Theheight of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐

Seite 147



tained at a predefined level under all load con‐ditions.The system ensures consistent comfort bykeeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐uations.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed. Thesystem is disrupted. Vehicle handling may bealtered and driving comfort may be noticeablyreduced. Visit the nearest dealer’s service cen‐ter or another qualified service center or repairshop.

Driving Dynamics ControlThe conceptThe Driving Dynamics Control can be used toadjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. Forthis purpose various programs are available forselection that are activated via the two buttonsof the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSCOFF-button.

Overview


Operating the programs

Press button Program

DSC OFFTRACTION

SPORT+SPORTCOMFORTECO PRO

Automatic program changeThe system may automatically switch to COM‐FORT in the following situations:▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control, Dy‐

namic Drive or xDrive.▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐

TION or DSC OFF mode.

DSC OFFDriving stability is limited during accelerationand when driving in curves.To increase vehicle stability, activate DSCagain as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFFPress and hold this button but not lon‐ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the

indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSCPress button.DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

Seite 148



Indicator/warning lightsWhen DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFFis activated.

TRACTIONMaximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTCDynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ing stability is limited during acceleration andwhen driving in curves.

Activating TRACTIONPress button.TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSCOFF lights up.

Deactivating TRACTIONPress button again.TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐

tor lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lightsIf TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is dis‐played in the instrument cluster.

The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC‐TION is activated.

SPORT+Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐pension and adjusted drivetrain with limiteddriving stabilization.Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.The driver handles several of the stabilizationtasks.

Activating SPORT+Press button repeatedly until SPORT+appears in the instrument cluster and

the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

Automatic program changeWhen switching on the manual speed limiter oractivating cruise control, the program automat‐ically switches to SPORT mode.

Indicator/warning lightsSPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:Dynamic Traction Control is activated.

SPORTConsistently sporty tuning of the suspensionand drivetrain for greater driving agility withmaximum driving stabilization.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐rently used.

Activating SPORTPress button repeatedly until SPORTis displayed in the instrument cluster.

COMFORTFor a balanced tuning with maximum drivingstabilization.

Activating COMFORTPress button repeatedly until COM‐FORT is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

In certain situations, the system automaticallychanges to the NORMAL program, automaticprogram change, refer to page 148.

Seite 149



ECO PROECO PRO, refer to page 205, provides consis‐tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption formaximum range with maximum driving stabili‐zation.Comfort functions and the engine Controllerare adjusted.The program can be configured to individualspecifications.

Activating ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"Make the desired settings.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected programThe instrument cluster displaysthe selected program.

Program selectionPressing the button displays alist of the selectable programs.Depending on your vehicle's op‐tional features, the list in the in‐strument cluster can differ from

the illustration shown.

Display on the Control DisplayProgram changes can be displayed briefly onthe Control Display.

To do so, make the following settings:

1. "Settings"2. "Control display"3. "Driving mode info"

Seite 150



Driving comfortVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Active Cruise Control withStop & Go function, ACCThe conceptUse this system to select a desired speed thatthe vehicle will maintain automatically on clearroads.To the extent possible, the system automati‐cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicleahead of you.The distance that the vehicle maintains to thevehicle ahead of you can be varied.For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐tomatically reduces the speed, applies thebrakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐cle ahead begins moving faster.If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, andthen proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐riod, the system is able to detect this within thegiven system limits. Your own vehicle willbrake automatically and then accelerate again.If the vehicle ahead of you drives away after aprolonged period, briefly press the acceleratorpedal or press the appropriate button to acti‐vate the system. The vehicle will automaticallyaccelerate.

As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐erates to the desired speed.The speed is also maintained downhill, butmay not be maintained uphill if engine power isinsufficient.

General informationDepending on the driving settings, the featuresof the cruise control can change in certainareas.


personal responsibility to correctly assess thetraffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐tem, it cannot independently react to all trafficsituations. There is risk of an accident. Adjustthe driving style to the traffic conditions. Watchtraffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐spective situations.◀





Seite 151

Driving comfort Controls


Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press but‐ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,refer to page 152

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 153

Resume speed, refer topage 154

Reduce distance, refer topage 154

Increase distance, refer topage 154

Rocker switch:Maintain, store, change speed,refer to page 153

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle'sseries, optional features and country specifica‐tions.

Radar sensorA radar sensor is located in the front bumperfor detecting vehicles on the road ahead of thevehicle.

Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐structed.

CameraA camera serves to detect vehicles.


Switching on/off and interruptingcruise control

Switching onPress button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterlight up and the mark in the speedometer is setto the current speed.Cruise control can be used.DSC will be switched on if needed.

Switching offTo switch off the system while standing, stepon brake pedal at the same time.

Press button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedis deleted.

InterruptingPress button on the steering wheel.

Seite 152

Controls Driving comfort


If interrupting the system while stationary,press on the brake pedal at the same time.The system is automatically interrupted in thefollowing situations:▷ When the brakes are applied.▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐

gaged.▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐

vated.▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are

opened while the vehicle is standing still.▷ If the system has not detected objects for

an extended period, for example, on a roadwith very little traffic without curb orshoulder markings.

▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.

▷ After a longer stationary period when thevehicle has been braked to a stop by thesystem.

Maintaining, storing, and changing thespeed

InformationWARNINGThe desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐

justed or called up by mistake. There is risk ofan accident. Adjust the desired speed to thetraffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐tively interfere in the respective situations.◀

WARNINGRisk of accident due to too high speed

differences to other vehicles, for example inthe following situations:▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving

vehicle.

▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the ownlane.

▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watchtraffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐spective situations.◀

Maintaining/storing the speedPress button.Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐terrupted.

When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed in the speedometer andbriefly in the instrument cluster, refer topage 154.DSC will be switched on if needed.

Changing the speedPress the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed when theroad is clear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desired

Seite 153



speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat theaction.

DistanceWARNINGThe system does not relieve from the

personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐dents or risk of property damage. Be aware tothe traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐tance to the traffic and weather conditions andmaintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐bly by braking.◀

Reduce distancePress button repeatedly until the de‐sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐tance, refer to page 155.

Increase distancePress button repeatedly until the de‐sired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐tance, refer to page 155.

Calling up the desired speed anddistance

While drivingPress button with the systemswitched on.

In the following cases, the stored speed valueis deleted and cannot be called up again:▷ When the system is switched off.▷ When the ignition is switched off.

While standingThe system brought the vehicle to a completestandstill:▷ Green marking in the speedometer:

Your vehicle accelerates automatically assoon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐dar sensor moves off.

▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐tomatic driving off.To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐matically, press the accelerator or pressthe RES or SET button.

Rolling bars in the distance display indicatethat the vehicle detected by the radar sensorhas driven off.The system was paused or your vehicle wasbrought to a halt actively through stepping onthe brake pedal and it is standing behind an‐other vehicle:

1. Press button to call up a storeddesired speed.

2. Release the brake pedal.3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the

RES rocker switch when the vehicle aheadof you drives away.


Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

Seite 154



If no speed is indicated, it is possible that theconditions necessary for operation are not cur‐rently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of youShown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ing ahead of you.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4This value is set automatically afterthe system is switched on.

The system has been interrupted ordistance control is temporarily sup‐pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehiclewas not detected.

Distance control is temporarily sup‐pressed because the acceleratorpedal is being pressed; a vehiclewas detected.

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has drivenaway.ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐tor pedal, pressing the RES button or rockerswitch.

Indicator/warning lightsSymbol lights up orange:A vehicle has been detected ahead ofyou.

Symbol flashes orange:The conditions are not adequate forthe system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies thebrakes until you actively resume control bypressing on the brake pedal or acceleratorpedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signalsounds:You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Displays in the Head-up DisplaySome system information can also be dis‐played in the Head-up Display.

Distance informationThe symbol is displayed when the dis‐tance from the vehicle traveling aheadis too short.

The distance information is active under thefollowing circumstances:▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,

refer to page 107.▷ Distance too short.▷ Speed greater than approx.

40 mph/70 km/h.

System limits



Seite 155



Speed rangeThe system is best used on well-constructedroads.The minimum speed that can be set is20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed thatcan be set depends on the vehicle.The system can also be activated when sta‐tionary.Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐uation when using the system.

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and theautomatic braking capacity are limited.Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might notbe detected.

DecelerationThe system also does not decelerate in the fol‐lowing situations:▷ For pedestrians or similar slow-moving

road users.▷ For red traffic lights.▷ For cross traffic.▷ For oncoming traffic.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detecteduntil it is completely within the same lane asyour vehicle.If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenlyswerves into your lane, the system may not beable to automatically restore the selected dis‐tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, for ex‐ample, when rapidly approaching a truck.When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliablydetected, the system requests that the driverintervene by braking and carrying out evasivemaneuvers, if needed.

WARNINGThe system does not relieve from the


Seite 156



Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, thespeed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, driveinto a curve at an appropriate speed.In tight curves the system offers only restricteddetection where a vehicle ahead of you mightbe detected late or not at all.

When you approach a curve the system maybriefly report vehicles in the next lane due tothe bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ating.After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐activated and controls speed independently.

Driving awayIn some situations, the vehicle cannot drive offautomatically; for example:▷ On steep inclines.▷ From behind bumps in the road.In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

WeatherIn the event of unfavorable weather and lightconditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐tions for vehicles that are already detected.Drive attentively, and react to the current trafficsituation. If necessary, intervene actively, forexample by braking, steering or evading.

MalfunctionThe system cannot be activated if the radarsensor is not aligned correctly. This may becaused by damage incurred during parking, forexample.A Check Control message is displayed if thesystem fails.The function for detecting and respondingwhen approaching stationary vehicles may belimited in the following situations:▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

ately after vehicle delivery.▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A

Check Control message is displayed.

Cruise controlThe conceptThe system maintains a preset speed via thebuttons on the steering wheel. The systembrakes on downhill gradients if engine brakingis insufficient.

General informationDepending on the driving settings, the featuresof the cruise control can change in certainareas.

Seite 157





WARNINGThe use of the system can lead to an in‐

creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐tions:▷ On winding roads.▷ In heavy traffic.▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.There is risk of accidents or risk of propertydamage. Only use the system if driving at con‐stant speed is possible.◀

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press but‐ton

Function

Cruise control on/off, interrupt,refer to page 158

Store/maintain speed, refer topage 159

Resume speed, refer topage 159

Rocker switch:Maintain, store, change speed,refer to page 159

Controls

Switching onPress button on the steering wheel.

The marking in the speedometer is set to thecurrent speed.The cruise control can be used.DSC will be switched on if needed.

Switching offPress button on the steering wheel.

▷ If active: press twice.▷ If interrupted: press once.The displays go out. The stored desired speedis deleted.

InterruptingWhen active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted in thefollowing situations:▷ When the brakes are applied.▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐

gaged.▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐

vated.▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.▷ If HDC is activated.▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

Dynamics Control.

Maintaining, storing, and changing thespeed

InformationWARNINGThe desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐

justed or called up by mistake. There is risk ofan accident. Adjust the desired speed to the

Seite 158



traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐tively interfere in the respective situations.◀

Maintaining/storing the speedPress button.Or:

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐terrupted.When the system is switched on, the currentspeed is maintained and stored as the desiredspeed.This is displayed in the speedometer andbriefly in the instrument cluster, refer topage 159.DSC will be switched on if needed.

Changing the speedPress the rocker switch up or down repeatedlyuntil the desired speed is set.If active, the displayed speed is stored and thevehicle reaches the stored speed when theroad is clear.▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to

the point of resistance, the desired speedincreases or decreases by approx.1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressedpast the point of resistance, the desiredspeed increases or decreases by a maxi‐mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.The maximum speed that can be set de‐pends on the vehicle.

▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐celerates the vehicle without requiringpressure on the accelerator pedal.After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing theswitch beyond the resistance point causesthe vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speedPress button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.


Indicator lampDepending on how the vehicle is equip‐ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐

tem is switched on.

Desired speed▷ The marking lights up green:

the system is active.▷ The marking lights up or‐

ange: the system has beeninterrupted.

▷ The marking does not light up: the systemis switched off.

Brief status displaySelected desired speed.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that theconditions necessary for operation are not cur‐rently fulfilled.

Displays in the Head-up DisplaySome system information can also be dis‐played in the Head-up Display.

Seite 159



PDC Park Distance ControlThe conceptPDC is a support when parking. When youslowly approach an object in the rear - or alsoin the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ble - then the object is reported through:▷ Signal tones.▷ Visual display.

General informationUltrasound sensors in the bumpers measurethe distances from objects.The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.6 ft/2 m.An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐

ner sensors at approx. 24 inches/60 cm.▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.▷ When a collision is imminent.



WARNINGDue to high speeds when PDC is acti‐

vated, the warning can be delayed due tophysical circumstances. There is risk of injuriesor risk of property damage. Avoid approachingan object too fast. Avoid driving off fast whilePDC is not yet active.◀

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

PDC Park Distance Control

Ultrasound sensorsUltrasound sensors of the PDC,for example in the bumpers.

Functional requirementsTo ensure full functionality:▷ Do not cover sensors, for example, with

stickers, bicycle racks.▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.To clean: when using high-pressure washers,do not spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in‐ches/30 cm.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyPDC switches on automatically in the followingsituations:▷ If selector lever position R is engaged

when the engine is running.The rearview camera also switches on.

▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐cles are detected behind or in front of the

Seite 160



vehicle by PDC and the speed is slowerthan approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

You may turn off automatic activation:

1. "Settings"2. "Parking"3. Select setting.


Automatic deactivation during forwardtravelThe system switches off when a certain drivingdistance or speed is exceeded.Switch the system back on if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/offmanually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Display

Signal tonesWhen approaching an object, an intermittentsound indicates the position of the object. E. g.if an object is detected to the left rear of thevehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rearspeaker.The shorter the distance to the object, theshorter the intervals.If the distance to a detected object is less thanapprox. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone issounded.With front PDC: if objects are located both infront of and behind the vehicle, an alternatingcontinuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selectorlever position P is engaged on vehicles withSteptronic transmission.

VolumeThe ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to theentertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"2. "Tone"3. "Volume settings"4. "PDC"5. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐

ting is selected.6. Press the Controller.Settings are stored for the profile currentlyused.

Visual warningThe approach of the vehicle to an object canbe shown on the Control Display. Objects thatare farther away are already displayed on theControl Display before a signal sounds.A display appears as soon as Park DistanceControl (PDC) is activated.The range of the sensors is represented in thecolors green, yellow and red.When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits



Seite 161



Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not function underthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, for ex‐

ample coats.▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, for example from passing vehiclesor loud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.▷ If cargo protrudes.Low objects already displayed, for example,curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warningsPDC may issue a warning under the followingconditions even though there is no obstaclewithin the detection range:▷ In heavy rain.▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered

with ice.▷ When sensors are covered in snow.▷ On rough road surfaces.▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed

bumps.

▷ In large buildings with right angles andsmooth walls, for example, in undergroundgarages.

▷ In automatic car washes.▷ Through heavy pollution.▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for exam‐

ple, sweeping machines, high pressuresteam cleaners or neon lights.

If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐tion on obstacle detection, for example in carwashes, refer to page 160, to reduce falsealarms.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The range of the sensors is shown as a shadedarea on the Control Display.PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

Surround ViewThe conceptSurround View comprises various camera as‐sistance systems that help the driver whenparking, maneuvering, and at complex exitsand intersections.▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 162.▷ Top View, refer to page 165.▷ Side View, refer to page 167.

Rearview cameraThe conceptThe rearview camera provides assistance inparking and maneuvering backwards. The areabehind the vehicle is shown on the ControlDisplay.

Seite 162




personal responsibility to correctly assess thetraffic situation. There is risk of an accident.Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundingsclosely and actively interfere in the respectivesituations.◀

Overview


Rearview camera

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of thetailgate. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the camera lens, refer to page 260.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage lever in posi‐tion P R.


Switching on/off manuallyPress button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.The PDC is shown on the Control Display.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Switching the view via iDriveWith PDC activated or Top View switched on:

"Rear view camera"The rearview camera image is displayed.


Functional requirement▷ The rearview camera is switched on.▷ The tailgate is fully closed.

Activating assistance functionsMore than one assistance function can be ac‐tive at the same time.▷ Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking"

Seite 163



Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐age of the rearview camera.Pathway lines help you to estimate the spacerequired when parking and maneuvering onlevel roads.Pathway lines depend on the current steeringangle and are continuously adjusted to thesteering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

Turning circle lines can only be superimposedon the rearview camera image together withpathway lines.Turning circle lines show the course of thesmallest possible turning radius on a levelroad.Only one turning radius line is displayed afterthe steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐gle.

Obstacle marking

Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected bythe PDC sensors and, when respectivelyequipped, detected by the rearview camera.Obstacle markings can be faded into the imageof the rearview camera.Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐ings match the markings of the PDC.

Parking using pathway and turningradius lines1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐

dius lines lead to within the limits of theparking space.

Seite 164



2. Turn the steering wheel to the point wherethe pathway line covers the correspondingturning radius line.

Display settings

BrightnessWith the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐

ting is reached, and press the Controller.

ContrastWith the rearview camera switched on:



System limits

Detection of objectsVery low obstacles as well as high, protrudingobjects such as ledges may not be detected bythe system.Assistance functions also take into accountdata of the PDC.Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer topage 160.The objects displayed on the Control Displayunder certain circumstances are closer thanthey appear. Do not estimate the distance fromthe objects on the display.

Top ViewThe conceptTop View provides assistance in parking andmaneuvering. The area around the vehicle isshown on the Control Display.

General informationThe image is captured by two camerasintegrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rear‐view camera and a camera on the front of thevehicle.The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m tothe side, front and rear.Obstacles within this range are thus displayedearly on the Control Display.



Overview


Top View

Seite 165



Cameras

Front camera

The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ings. The image quality may be impaired bydirt.Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 260.

Functional requirementsTop View can be used only to a limited extentin the following situations:▷ With a door open.▷ With the tailgate open.▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.▷ In poor light.The unavailable camera range is depicted byshading.

Switching on/off

Switching on automaticallyWith the engine running, engage lever in posi‐tion P R.

The rearview camera image is displayed. Toswitch to the Top View:

"Rear view camera"



▷ On: the LED lights up.▷ Off: the LED goes out.Top View is displayed.The rearview camera image is displayed whenthe reverse gear is engaged by pressing thebutton.

Display

Display on the Control DisplayThe area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐played on the Control Display.The display appears as soon as Top View isactivated.When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐played, it is possible to switch to top view:

"Rear view camera"

BrightnessWith Top View switched on:



ContrastWith Top View switched on:

1. Select the symbol.

Seite 166



2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ting is reached, and press the Controller.

Displaying the turning radius andpathway lines▷ The static, red turning radius line shows

the space needed to the side of the vehiclewhen the steering wheel is turned all theway.

▷ The variable, green pathway line assistsyou in assessing the amount of space ac‐tually needed to the side of the vehicle.The lane line depends on the engagedgear and the current steering angle. Thetrack line is continuously adjusted for thesteering wheel movement.

"Parking aid lines"Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.

System limitsA Check Control message is displayed when acamera is not working.

Side ViewThe concept

Side View provides an early look at cross trafficat blind driveways and intersections. Roadusers concealed by obstacles to the left andright of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐tively late from the driver's seat. To improvethe viewing, each camera, front and rear on thevehicle, detects the traffic area on the side.

Which camera is active is shown on the topedge of the screen.

InformationThe images of the cameras are displayed, de‐pending on the gear selected, on the ControlDisplay.



Overview


Side View

Cameras

Front camera

Seite 167



Rear cameraTwo cameras are used for the detection.The image quality may be impaired by dirt.Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 260.

Switching on/off


Depending on the transmission position, thepicture of the front or rear camera is displayed.

Switching off automaticallyBy switching into a different function or whenchanging gears.Front Side View: when a certain driving dis‐tance or speed is exceeded.

Display

General informationThe traffic area in front of or behind the vehicleis displayed on the Control Display.

BrightnessWith the Side View switched on:



ContrastWith the Side View switched on:



Warning of crossing traffic

The conceptWhen an object approaching from the side isdetected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐picted by a symbol in the Side View display.

Requirements▷ Side View switched on.▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking

speed.▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient

brightness, for example, daylight is neces‐sary.

DisplayThe yellow symbol is displayed if anapproaching vehicle is detected by thecamera.

A gray symbol is displayed if crossingtraffic cannot be detected.

System limitsIn the following situations, the warning aboutcrossing traffic may be limited:▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.

System limitsThe objects displayed on the Control Displayunder certain circumstances are closer thanthey appear. Therefore, do not estimate thedistance from the objects on the display.The viewing angle is approx. 180°.

Seite 168



Parking assistantThe concept

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐lel to the road.Parking assistant handling is divided into threesteps:▷ Switching on and activating.▷ Parking space search.▷ Parking.System status and instructions on required ac‐tions are displayed on the Control Display.Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaceson both sides of the vehicle.The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐sible parking line and during the parking proce‐dure takes control of steering, the accelerationand braking and if needed changes the gears.Hold down the parking assistant button for theduration of the parking procedure.

InformationA component of the parking assistant is thePDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 160.When parking, also take note of the visual andacoustic information and instructions issuedby the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐view camera and react accordingly.Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC'ssignal tone.



CAUTIONThe parking assistant can steer the vehi‐

cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of propertydamage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐terfere in the respective situations.◀

An engine that has been switched off by theAuto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐cally when the parking assistant is activated.

Overview


Parking assistant

Seite 169



Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parkingspaces are located on the side of the vehicle.To ensure full functionality:▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the sensors for long periods andmaintain a distance of at least 12 in‐ches/30 cm.

▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐

prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐

cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum

length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:

your vehicle's length plus approx.4 ft/1.2 m.

▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Regarding the parking procedure▷ Doors and tailgate closed.▷ Parking brake released.▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the buttonPress button.The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gearShift into reverse.The current status of the parking space searchis indicated on the Control Display.To activate: "Parking Assistant"


System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.White: the system is available butnot activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and systemstatus

▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the sideof the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistantis activated and search for parking spaceactive.

Seite 170



▷ Control Display shows suitable parkingspaces at the edge of the road next to thevehicle symbol. When the parking assistantis active, suitable parking spaces are high‐lighted.

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐tive. Steering control hasbeen taken over by system.

▷ Parking space search is always activewhenever the vehicle is moving forwardslow and straight, even if the system is de‐activated. When the system is deactivated,the displays on the Control Display areshown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

1. Press button or shift into reverse gearto switch the parking assistant on, refer topage 170. Activate the parking assistant ifneeded.

Parking assistant is activated.2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed

of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at adistance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.The status of the parking space search andpossible parking spaces are displayed onthe Control Display, refer to page 170.

3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐play.Hold down the parking assistant button forthe duration of the parking procedure. Atthe end of the parking procedure, the P se‐lector lever position is set.The end of the parking procedure is indi‐cated on the Control Display.

4. Adjust the parking position yourself ifneeded.

Interrupting manuallyThe parking assistant can be interrupted at anytime:

▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbolon the Control Display.

▷ Press button.

Interrupting automaticallyThe system is interrupted automatically in thefollowing situations:▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if

he takes over steering.▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road

surfaces.▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to

overcome, such as curbs.▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly

arise.▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays

clearances that are too small.▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded.▷ When switching to another function on the

Control Display.▷ When the button is released.▷ If the tailgate is open.▷ If doors are open.▷ When setting the parking brake.▷ During acceleration.▷ When braking.▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.A Check Control message is displayed.

ResumeAn interrupted parking procedure can be con‐tinued if needed.Reactivate the parking assistant, refer topage 170, and follow the instructions on theControl Display.

Switching offThe system can be deactivated as follows:

Seite 171



▷ Press button.

System limits



No parking assistanceThe parking assistant does not offer assis‐tance in the following situations:▷ In tight curves.

Functional limitationsThe system may not be fully functional in thefollowing situations:▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.▷ On slippery ground.▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the

parking space.▷ With ditches or edges, for example an edge

of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurementUltrasonic measuring might not function underthe following circumstances:▷ For small children and animals.▷ For persons with certain clothing, for ex‐

ample coats.▷ With external interference of the ultra‐

sound, for example from passing vehiclesor loud machines.

▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐aged or out of position.

▷ Under certain weather conditions such ashigh relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐treme heat or strong wind.

▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of othervehicles.

▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.▷ With moving objects.▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as

ledges or cargo.▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.▷ With objects with a fine surface structure

such as fences.▷ For objects with porous surfaces.▷ If cargo protrudes.Low objects already displayed, for example,curbs, can move into the blind area of the sen‐sors before or after a continuous tone sounds.It can happen that parking spaces are detectedthat are not suitable or suitable parking spacesare not detected.

MalfunctionA Check Control message is displayed.The parking assistant failed. Have the systemchecked.

Seite 172



Climate controlVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left2 Temperature, left3 AUTO program, left4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat5 Remove ice and condensation6 Maximum cooling7 Display8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right9 AUTO program, right10 Temperature, right

11 Air distribution, right12 Seat heating, right 5813 Active seat ventilation, right 5814 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐

lated-air mode15 Cooling function16 Rear window defroster17 SYNC program18 Active seat ventilation, left 5819 Seat heating, left 58

Seite 173

Climate control Controls


Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching onPress any button except:▷ Rear window defroster.▷ Left side of Air volume button.▷ Seat heating.▷ Seat ventilation.▷ If necessary, SYNC program.

Switching off▷ Complete system:

Press and hold the left button onthe driver's side until the control

clicks off.▷ On the front passenger side:

Press and hold the left button onthe front passenger side.

TemperatureTurn the ring to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neededby using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐pacity, and then keeps it constant.Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐just the set temperature.

Cooling functionThe air in the car's interior will be cooled anddehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ture setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can be cooled via the A/Cbutton with the engine running and/or withdrive readiness activated.

Press button.Air conditioning is switched on or off.

Depending on the weather, the windshield andside windows may fog up briefly when the en‐gine is started or drive readiness is activated.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.When using the automatic climate control,condensation water, refer to page 199, devel‐ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Maximum coolingPress button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, optimum air flow and air circulationmode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐gion. The vents need to be open for this.The function is available above an externaltemperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with theengine running or when electrical drive readi‐ness is indicated is indicated.Adjust air flow with the program active.

AUTO programPress button.Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature,AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ces, the air is directed to the windshield, sidewindows, upper body, and into the floor area.The cooling function, refer to page 174, isswitched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐gram.

Seite 174

Controls Climate control


At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐trols the program so as to prevent windowcondensation as much as possible.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program activated, the auto‐matic intensity control can be changed.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air modeYou may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐rarily suspending the supply of outside air. Thesystem then recirculates the air currentlywithin the vehicle.

Press button repeatedly to select anoperating mode:

▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air

control: a sensor detects pollutants in theoutside air and shuts off automatically.

▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: thesupply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐manently blocked.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the airquality in the car's interior deteriorates and thefogging of the windows increases.If the windows are fogged over, switch off therecirculated-air mode and press the AUTObutton on the driver's side to utilize the con‐densation sensor. Make sure that air can flowto the windshield.

Air flow, manualTo manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display ofthe automatic climate control.The air flow of the automatic climate controlmay be reduced automatically to save batterypower.

Manual air distributionPress button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and floor area.▷ Floor area.▷ Windows and floor area.▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor

area.▷ Windows: driver's side only.▷ Windows and upper body region.If the windows are fogged over, press theAUTO button on the driver's side to utilize thecondensation sensor.

SYNC programThe current settings on the driver'sside for temperature, air flow, air distri‐

bution, and AUTO program are transferred tothe front passenger side and to the left andright rear.The program is switched off if the settings onthe front passenger side or in the rear arechanged.

Defrosts windows and removescondensation

Press button.Ice and condensation are quickly re‐

moved from the windshield and the front sidewindows.

Seite 175



For this purpose, point the side vents onto theside windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.If the windows are fogged over, you can alsoswitch on the cooling function or press theAUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐sor.

Rear window defrosterPress button.The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filterThe microfilter removes dust and pollen fromthe incoming air.The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseouspollutants from the outside air that enters thevehicle.This combined filter should be replaced duringmaintenance, refer to page 243, of the vehicle.

VentilationFront ventilation

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature inthe upper body region, arrow 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.The set interior temperature for the driverand passenger are not changed.

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,arrow 2.

▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing thevents continuously, arrows 3.

Adjusting the ventilation▷ Ventilation for cooling:

Direct vent in your direction when vehicle'sinterior is too hot.

▷ Draft-free ventilation:Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

Ventilation in rear, center

▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐row 1.Toward blue: colder.Toward red: warmer.


▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 3.

Seite 176



Ventilation, side

▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening andclosing of the vents, arrow 1.


Rear automatic climatecontrolOverview

1 Temperature2 AUTO program3 Vent settings4 Air flow, AUTO intensity5 Display6 Maximum cooling7 Seat heating 59

Switching the rear automatic climatecontrol on/off1. "Settings"2. "Climate"

3. "Rear climate"The rear automatic climate control is not op‐erational if the automatic climate control isswitched off or if the function for defrosting ordefogging the windows is active.

Switching the system on/off

Switching onPress any button except:▷ Left side of Air volume button.▷ Seat heating.

Switching offPress and hold the left button.

TemperatureTurn the ring to set the desiredtemperature.

The automatic climate control achieves thistemperature as quickly as possible, if neededby using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐pacity, and then keeps it constant.Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐perature settings. The automatic climate con‐trol will not have sufficient time to adjust theset temperature.

Maximum coolingPress button.The system is set to the lowest tem‐

perature, maximum air flow and recirculated-airmode.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐gion. The vents need to be open for this.Air is cooled as quickly as possible:▷ At an external temperature of approx.

32 ℉/0 ℃.

Seite 177



▷ When the engine is running or when elec‐trical drive readiness is available.

AUTO programPress button.Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐

ture are controlled automatically:

Depending on the selected temperature, theAUTO intensity, and outside influences, the airis directed to the upper body and into the floorarea.The cooling function is switched on automati‐cally with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO programWith the AUTO program activated, the auto‐matic intensity control can be changed:

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase intensity.

The selected intensity is shown on the displayof the automatic climate control.

Air flow, manualTo manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐gram first.

Press the left or right side of the but‐ton: decrease or increase air flow.

The selected air flow is shown on the display ofthe automatic climate control.

Manual air distributionThe air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐ual needs.

Press button repeatedly to select aprogram:

▷ Upper body region.▷ Upper body region and floor area.▷ Floor area.

Stationary climate controlThe conceptStationary climate control cools or heats theinterior prior to departure to a comfortabletemperature.The system automatically cools, vents, andheats depending on the interior, external, andset temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐moved more easily.The air automatically exits through the vents tothe windshield, the side windows, the upperbody region and into the floor area.The stationary climate control can be switchedon and off via the following systems:▷ Direct operation, refer to page 179.▷ Preselected departure times, refer to

page 179.With a BMW Remote App, refer to page 179,the stationary climate control can be switchedon.The system switches off automatically after acertain period of time.If stationary climate control is used during thecharging process, less air conditioning ca‐pacity will be required while driving. This opti‐mizes the range.

Functional requirements▷ When the departure time is preselected

and in direct operation: depends on inter‐nal, external and set temperature.

▷ High-voltage battery sufficiently chargedor charging cable connected.If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐charged, it can take some time after con‐necting the charging cable, until the sta‐tionary climate control will be functional.

▷ Motor switched off and/or drive readinessdeactivated.

▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out.

Seite 178



Switching on/off directlyOn the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Climate"3. "Activate comfort climate control"

Activate climate control at departuretimeThe reel-on time is automatically determinedbased on the temperature. The systempromptly switches on before the selected de‐parture time.On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"2. "Departure time"3. "Departure 1:"4. "Precondition for departure time"5. Set and activate Desired departure time,

refer to page 216. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐vated.

The symbol on the automatic climate con‐trol flashes when the stationary climate controlhas been switched on.

Activating with BMW Remote AppUsing an appropriate BMW App with remotefunction, the system can be directly switchedon or via a preset departure time.

Seite 179



Interior equipmentVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Universal Integrated RemoteControlThe conceptThe Universal Integrated Remote Control canoperate up to 3 functions of remote-controlledsystems such as garage door drives or lightingsystems. The Universal Integrated RemoteControl replaces up to 3 different hand-heldtransmitters. To operate the remote control,the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐grammed with the desired functions. Thehand-held transmitter for the particular systemis required in order to program the remote con‐trol.Before selling the vehicle, delete the storedfunctions for the sake of security.

InformationWARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing remote-controlled systems, for examplethe garage door, using the integrated universalremote control. There is risk of injuries or riskof property damage. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the respective system is clearduring programming and operation. Also follow

the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐mitter.◀

CompatibilityIf this symbol is printed on the packag‐ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐tem to be controlled, the system is

generally compatible with the UniversalIntegrated Remote Control.If you have any questions, please contact:▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐

fied service center or repair shop.▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of GentexCorporation.

Control elements on the interior mirror

▷ LED, arrow 1.▷ Buttons, arrow 2.▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐

quired for programming.

Programming

General information1. Switch on the ignition.2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button onthe interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐

Seite 180

Controls Interior equipment


proximately 20 seconds until the LED onthe interior mirror flashes. This erases allprogramming of the buttons on the interiormirror.

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons ofthe interior mirror. The required distancedepends on the manual transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the buttonof the desired function on the hand-heldtransmitter and the button to be program‐med on the interior mirror. The LED on theinterior mirror will begin flashing slowly.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the LEDflashes more rapidly. The LED flashingfaster indicates that the button on the inte‐rior mirror has been programmed.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance be‐tween the interior mirror and the hand-heldtransmitter and repeat the step. Severalmore attempts at different distances maybe necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐tween attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and repeat‐edly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

6. To program other functions on other but‐tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the inte‐rior mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-code wireless systemIf you are unable to operate the system afterrepeated programming, please check if thesystem to be controlled features an alternat‐ing-code radio system.Read the system's owner's manual, or pressthe programmed button on the interior mirrorlonger. If the LED on the interior mirror starts

flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code radio system. Flashing and continuous il‐lumination of the LED will repeat for approxi‐mately 20 seconds.For systems with an alternating-code radiosystem, the universal remote control and thesystem also have to be synchronized.Please read the owner's manual to find outhow to synchronize the system.Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ond person.Synchronizing the universal remote controlwith the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐mote-controlled system.

2. Program the relevant button on the interiormirror as described.

3. Locate and press the synchronizing buttonon the system being programmed. Youhave approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on theinterior mirror for approximately 3 secondsand then release it. If necessary, repeat thisstep up to three times in order to finishsynchronization. Once synchronization iscomplete, the programmed function will becarried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons1. Switch on the ignition.2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to

be programmed.3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts

flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away fromthe buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐quired distance depends on the manualtransmitter.

Seite 181

Interior equipment Controls


4. Likewise, press and hold the button of thedesired function on the hand-held trans‐mitter.

5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. TheLED flashing faster indicates that the but‐ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐grammed. The system can then be con‐trolled by the button on the interior mirror.If the LED does not flash faster after atleast 60 seconds, change the distance andrepeat the step. Several more attempts atdifferent distances may be necessary. Waitat least 15 seconds between attempts.Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, holddown the interior mirror button and repeat‐edly press and release the hand-heldtransmitter button for 2 seconds.

ControlsWARNINGBody parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing remote-controlled systems, for examplethe garage door, using the integrated universalremote control. There is risk of injuries or riskof property damage. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the respective system is clearduring programming and operation. Also followthe safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐mitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can beoperated using the button on the interior mirrorwhile the engine is running or when the ignitionis started. To do this, hold down the buttonwithin receiving range of the system until thefunction is activated. The interior mirror LEDstays lit while the wireless signal is beingtransmitted.

Deleting stored functionsPress and hold the left and right button on theinterior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐mately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐

idly. All stored functions will be deleted. Thefunctions cannot be deleted individually.

Sun visorGlare shieldFold the sun visor down or up.

Glare shield from the side

Folding out1. Fold the sun visor down.2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to

the side.3. Move it back to the desired position.

Folding upProceed in the reverse order to close the sunvisor.

Vanity mirrorA vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐hind a cover. When the cover is opened, themirror lighting switches on.

AshtrayFront

Opening

Slide the cover forward.

Seite 182



EmptyingTake out the insert.

Rear

Opening

Press on the cover.

EmptyingTake out the insert.

LighterInformation

WARNINGContact with hot heating elements or the

hot socket of the cigarette lighter can causeburns. Flammable materials can ignite if thecigarette lighter falls down or is held againstthe respective objects. There is risk of fire andinjuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐rette lighter and do not burn themselves, forexample by carrying the remote control alongwhen exiting the vehicle.◀

CAUTIONIf metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter orsocket cover again after using the socket.◀

Front

Overview

The lighter is located next to the ashtray.

ControlsPush in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Rear

Overview

The cigarette lighter is located in the rear cen‐ter console.

ControlsPush in the lighter.The lighter can be removed assoon as it pops back out.

Seite 183



Connecting electricaldevicesInformation

CAUTIONBattery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐work can be overloaded or damaged. There isrisk of property damage. Only connect batterychargers for the vehicle battery to the startingaid terminals in the engine compartment.◀

CAUTIONIf metal objects fall into the socket, they

can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter orsocket cover again after using the socket.◀

Sockets

General informationThe lighter socket can be used as a socket forelectrical equipment while the engine is run‐ning or when the ignition is switched on.

InformationThe total load of all sockets must not exceed140 watts at 12 volts.Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐patible connectors.

Front center console


Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Center armrest

Remove the cover.

Rear center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

Fold open the cover.

Seite 184



USB interface for datatransferThe conceptConnection for importing and exporting dataon USB devices, for example:▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 39.▷ Music collection, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐cation.

InformationObserve the following when connecting:▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lights to the USB interface.▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐

ing external devices.

With navigation system Professionalor TV: at a glance

The USB interface is located in the center arm‐rest.

Cargo areaCargo cover

InformationCAUTIONA cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can

cause damage. There is risk of property dam‐age. Hook the cargo cover on both sides.◀

WARNINGLoose objects or devices with a cable

connection to the vehicle, for example mobilephones, can be thrown into the car's interiorwhile driving, for example in the event of an ac‐cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐vers. There is risk of injuries. Secure loose ob‐jects or devices with a cable connection to thevehicle in the car's interior.◀

WARNINGA cargo cover that snaps back quickly

can jam body parts or cause damage. There isrisk of injuries or risk of property damage. Donot let the cargo cover snap back into place.◀

Attaching

1. Remove cargo cover, arrow 1.2. Hook cargo cover into the brackets on both

sides, arrows 2.

RemovingThe cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐gage.

Seite 185



1. Press button, arrow 1, to unlock the cover.2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2.

InstallingSlide the cover forward horizontally into thetwo side brackets until it audibly latches. Thered warning fields disappear. Tug on the coverto check if it is properly locked in place.

Enlarging the cargo area

General informationThe cargo area can be enlarged by foldingdown the rear seat backrest.The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of40–20–40. The sides and the middle sectioncan be folded down separately.

InformationWARNINGDanger of jamming with folding down the

backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Make sure that the area ofmovement of the rear backrest is clear prior tofolding down.◀


is limited or compromised with incorrect seatadjustment or improper installation of the childseat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.Make sure that the child restraint system fitssecurely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐just the backrest tilt for all affected backrestsand correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that

seats and backrests are securely engaged. Ifpossible, adjust the height of the head re‐straints or remove them.◀

WARNINGWith an unlocked backrest, an unsecured

load can be thrown into the car's interior, forexample in case of an accident, braking or eva‐sive maneuver. There is risk of injuries. Makesure that the backrest engages into the lockingafter folding it back.◀

WARNINGWith a rear backrest that is not locked,

the protective function of the middle safetybelt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuriesor danger to life. If you are using the middlesafety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀

Folding down the sidesCAUTIONScreens in the rear can be damaged

when folding down the rear backrest. There isrisk of property damage. Make sure that thearea of movement is clear prior to folding downthe rear backrest.◀

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Seite 186



Folding down the middle section

Reach into the recess and pull forward.

Seite 187



Storage compartmentsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

InformationWARNINGLoose objects or devices with a cable


CAUTIONAnti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can

damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀

Storage compartmentsThe following storage compartments are avail‐able in the vehicle interior:▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger

side, refer to page 188.▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,

refer to page 189.▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to

page 189.

▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐sole, refer to page 189.

▷ Center armrest, refer to page 189.▷ Glasses compartment, refer to page 190.

Glove compartmentFront passenger side

InformationWARNINGFolded open, the glove compartment

protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, for example in theevent of an accident or during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Al‐ways close the glove compartment immedi‐ately after using it.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.The light in the glove compartment switcheson.The retaining strap in the glove compartmentis used to store small objects.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Seite 188

Controls Storage compartments


LockingThe glove compartment can be locked with anintegrated key. This prevents access to theglove compartment.After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐mote control can be handed over, such as at ahotel, without the integrated key.

Driver's side

InformationWARNINGFolded open, the glove compartment

protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in theglove compartment can be thrown into thecar's interior while driving, for example in theevent of an accident or during braking and eva‐sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. Al‐ways close the glove compartment immedi‐ately after using it.◀

Opening

Pull the handle.

ClosingFold cover closed.

Compartments in the doorsWARNINGBreakable object, for example glass bot‐

tle, can break in the event of an accident. Bro‐ken glass can be scattered in the car's interior.

There is risk of injuries. Do not stow any break‐able objects in the car's interior.◀

Storage compartment on thecenter consoleOpening


ClosingSlide the cover rearward.

Small storage compartment

Storage possibility for small objects, for exam‐ple, coins.

Center armrestFront

OverviewLocated in the center armrest between thefront seats is a storage compartment and de‐

Seite 189

Storage compartments Controls


pending on how the vehicle is equipped alsoan elastic band on the left side and a cover forthe snap-in adapter.

Opening

Push the cover down slightly and press thebutton, see arrow. The respective cover foldsup.

ClosingFold the respective cover down until it latches.

Connection for an external audiodevice

An external audio device, for ex‐ample, an MP3 player, can beconnected via the AUX-IN portor the USB audio interface in thecenter armrest.

Rear

OverviewA storage compartment is located in the centerarmrest between the seats.

Opening1. Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐

rest.

2. Pull the handle.

ClosingPress cover down until it latches.

Glasses compartmentOverviewThe compartment for eye glasses is locatedbetween the interior mirror and interior lights.

Seite 190



Opening

Press button.

ClosingPress the cover up until it latches.

Cup holdersInformation

WARNINGUnsuitable containers in the cup holder

and hot beverages can damage the cup holderand increase the risk of injuries in the event ofan accident. There is risk of injuries or risk ofproperty damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐ble, and sealable containers. Do not transporthot beverages. Do not force objects into thecup holder.◀

Front

OverviewIn the center console.


Two cup holders are located in the center con‐sole.

Rear

InformationCAUTIONWith an open cup holder, the center arm‐

rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk ofproperty damage. Press back the covers be‐fore the center armrest is folded up.◀

OverviewIn the center armrest.

Seite 191



Opening1. Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐

rest.

2. Press button.

ClosingPress both covers inward back against eachother.

Clothes hooksInformation

WARNINGClothing articles on the clothes hooks

can obstruct the view while driving. There isrisk of an accident. When suspending clothingarticles from the hooks, ensure that they willnot obstruct the driver's view.◀

WARNINGImproper use of the clothes hooks can

lead to a danger of objects flying about duringbraking and evasive maneuvers. There is riskof injuries and risk of property damage. Only

hang lightweight objects, for example clothingarticles, from the clothes hooks.◀

General informationThe clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐dles in the rear.

Storage compartments in thecargo areaStorage space under cargo floor panel

Fold up the cargo floor panel. The storagespace is used for stowing lightweight objects.

Multi-function hookWARNINGImproper use of the multifunction hooks

can lead to a danger of objects flying aboutduring braking and evasive maneuvers. Thereis risk of injuries and risk of property damage.Only hang lightweight objects, for exampleshopping bags, from the multifunction hooks.Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo areaif it has been appropriately secured.◀

Seite 192



Depending on the installed equipment version,there are one or two multi-function hooks inthe cargo area.

Retaining strapA retaining strap is available on the left sidetrim for fastening small objects.

NetSmaller objects can be stored in the net on theleft side of the cargo area.

Storage compartment on the rightsideA waterproof storage compartment is availableon the right side of the cargo area.

Left side storage compartment

Pull the handle.

Lashing eyes in the cargo areaTo secure the cargo, refer to page 202, thereare lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo net, FlexNetTo secure the cargo, refer to page 202, theflexible cargo net can also be used.

Seite 193




Driving tipsThis chapter provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving andoperating modes.


Things to remember when drivingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Breaking-in periodGeneral informationMoving parts need time to adjust to one an‐other (break-in time).The following instructions will help accomplisha long vehicle life and good efficiency.

InformationWARNINGDue to new parts and components,

safety and driver assistance systems can reactwith a delay. There is risk of an accident. Afterinstalling new parts or with a new vehicle, driveconservatively and interfere early if necessary.Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐spective parts and components.◀

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 kmDo not exceed the maximum engine and roadspeed:▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐stances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 kmThe engine and vehicle speed can gradually beincreased.

TiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;they achieve their full traction potential after abreak-in time.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Brake systemBrakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐formance between brake discs and brakepads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐riod.

Following part replacementThe same break-in procedures should be ob‐served if any of the components above-men‐tioned have to be renewed in the course of thevehicle's operating life.

Using the hybrid systemefficientlyThe conceptThe vehicle's hybrid system runs automati‐cally. Through foresighted driving, the hybridproperties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel con‐sumption and energy recovery are optimized.

Optimizing energy recovery

Types of energy recoveryEnergy recovery is used to charge the high-voltage battery. It is important for the supply ofelectrical components and thus a prerequisite

Seite 196

Driving tips Things to remember when driving


for fuel efficiency. It appears in three stagesduring coasting to a halt and braking.

Low energy recovery:During coasting to a halt without stepping onthe brake.

Average energy recovery:During a slight deceleration by gently pressingthe brake pedal.

Maximum energy recovery:During firmer pressing on the brake pedal.

Foresighted driving and decelerating helpswith optimizing energy recovery.

Optimum energy recoveryAs soon as the display shows the maximumenergy recovery, only press the brake pedalharder if required by the situation.

Exemplary traffic situations for fuelefficiencyIn many driving situations, the hybrid systemallows for a particularly efficient energy man‐agement.▷ Stop-and-go traffic:

The combustion engine is switched on orover automatically by the hybrid system.

▷ Driving with constant speed:With the ASSIST drivetrain support, theelectric motor relieves the combustion en‐gine periodically by being switched on au‐tomatically.

Discharge of the high-voltage battery

General informationLonger idle periods, refer to page 260, can re‐duce the charging state of the high-voltagebattery.

InformationCAUTIONThe high-voltage battery can be dam‐

aged by excessive discharge. There is risk ofproperty damage. Before storing the vehiclefor an extended period, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idleperiod, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐tion at a compatible charging location. If nec‐essary, the high-voltage battery will becharged automatically. Make sure that thecharging process takes place. Regularly checkthe charging state.Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longerthan three months with a charging state belowapprox. 50 %.◀

Seite 197

Things to remember when driving Driving tips


General driving notesClosing the tailgate

WARNINGAn open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐

cle and can endanger occupants and othertraffic participants or damage the vehicle in theevent of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enterthe vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries orrisk of property damage. Do not drive with thetailgate open.◀

If driving with the tailgate open cannot beavoided:▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.▷ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust systemWARNINGDuring driving operation, high tempera‐

tures can occur underneath the body, for ex‐ample caused by the exhaust gas system. Ifcombustible materials, such as leaves or grass,come in contact with hot parts of the exhaustgas system, these materials can ignite. Thereis risk of injuries or risk of property damage.Do not remove the heat shields installed andnever apply undercoating to them. Make surethat no combustible materials can come incontact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch thehot exhaust system.◀

Mobile communication devices in thevehicle

WARNINGVehicle electronics and mobile phones

can influence one another. There is radiationdue to the send operations of mobile phones.There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐age. If possible, in the car's interior use only

mobile phones with direct connections to anexterior antenna in order to exclude mutualdisturbance and deflect the radiation from thecar's interior.◀

HydroplaningOn wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water canform between the tires and road surface.This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ing. It is characterized by a partial or completeloss of contact between the tires and the roadsurface, ultimately undermining your ability tosteer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through waterCAUTIONWhen driving too quickly through too

deep water, water can enter into the enginecompartment, the electrical system or thetransmission. There is risk of property damage.When driving through water, do not exceed themaximum indicated water level and the maxi‐mum speed for driving through water.◀

When driving through water, observe the fol‐lowing:▷ Drive through calm water only.▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper

than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.▷ Drive through water no faster than walking

speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Braking safelyYour vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ard feature.Perform an emergency stop in situations thatrequire such.Steering is still responsive. You can still avoidany obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐fort.Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds fromthe hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in itsactive mode.

Seite 198



In certain braking situations, the perforatedbrake discs can cause functional problems.However, this has no effect on the perform‐ance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects in the movement area aroundpedals and floor area

WARNINGObjects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.There is risk of an accident. Stow objects inthe vehicle such that they are secured andcannot enter into the driver's floor area. Usefloor mats that are suitable for the vehicle andcan be safely attached to the floor. Do not useloose floor mats and do not layer several floormats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor matsare securely fastened again after they were re‐moved, for example for cleaning.◀

Driving in wet conditionsWhen roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,press brake pedal ever so gently every fewmiles.Ensure that this action does not endangerother traffic.The heat generated in this process helps drythe brake discs and pads.In this way braking efficiency will be availablewhen you need it.

HillsWARNINGLight but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing outand possibly even brake failure. There is risk ofan accident. Avoid placing excessive stress onthe brake system.◀

WARNINGIn idle, in the ECO PRO driving program

or with drive readiness switched off, safety-rel‐evant functions are restricted or not available

anymore, for example braking effect of the en‐gine or braking force and steering support.There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle,in the ECO PRO driving program or with drivereadiness switched off.◀

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in thegear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐wise the brakes may overheat and reducebrake efficiency.You can increase the engine's braking effectby shifting down, going all the way to first gear,if needed.

Brake disc corrosionCorrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐lowing circumstances:▷ Low mileage.▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.Corrosion will built up when the maximumpressure applied to the brake pads duringbraking is not reached - thus discs don't getcleaned.Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will causea pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parkedvehicleWhen using the automatic climate control,condensation water develops collecting under‐neath the vehicle.

Driving on poor roadsThe vehicle combines all-wheel drive with theadvantages of a normal automobile.

Seite 199

Things to remember when driving Driving tips


CAUTIONObjects in unpaved areas, for example

stones or branches, can damage the vehicle.There is risk of property damage. Do not driveon unpaved terrain.◀

For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐gers and of the vehicle, heed the followingpoints:▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before

starting a trip; do not take risks in driving.▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐

ditions. The steeper and more uneven theroad surface, the slower the speed shouldbe.

▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhillgrades: add engine oil and coolant up tonear the MAX mark. Uphill and downhillgrades can be traveled up to no more than50 %.

▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill DescentControl HDC, refer to page 146.Starting out is possible on uphill grades upto 32 %. The permissible side tilt is 50 %.

▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming incontact with the ground.The ground clearance is no more than7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary accordingto the vehicle's load.

▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress theaccelerator so that driving stability controlsystems can distribute the driving force tothe wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐tion Control if available.

After a trip on poor roadsAfter a trip on poor roads, check wheels andtires for damage to maintain driving safety.Clear heavy soiling from the body.

Seite 200



LoadingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

InformationWARNINGHigh gross weight can overheat the tires,

damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tireinflation pressure. There is risk of an accident.Pay attention to the permitted load capacity ofthe tires and never exceed the permitted grossweight.◀

CAUTIONFluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐

age. There is risk of property damage. Makesure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀

WARNINGLoose objects or devices with a cable


Determining the load limit1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle’s placard:

▷ The combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceed XXX kgor YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to thevehicle and unstable driving situationsmay result.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orYYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca‐pacity.For example, if the YYY amount equals1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbspassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacityis 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

Seite 201

Loading Driving tips


Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight ofthe occupants and the cargo.The greater the weight of the occupants, theless cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐

ble, directly behind and at the bottom ofthe rear passenger seat backrests.

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is notoccupied, secure each of the outer safetybelts in the opposite buckle.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backreststo stow cargo.

▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge ofthe backrests.

Securing cargoLashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are four lashingeyes in the cargo area.

Cargo net, FlexNetThe flexible cargo net is hooked into eyes andoffers a stowage option in the cargo area. Thestorage net can be attached to the followingeyes:

▷ Lashing eyes in the cargo floor panel.▷ Eyes on the cargo area wall.The eyes are located on both sides of thecargo area.

Securing cargoWARNINGImproperly stowed objects can shift and

be thrown into the car's interior, for example inthe event of an accident or during braking andevasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can behit and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stowand secure objects and cargo properly.◀

Seite 202

Driving tips Loading


▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with re‐taining straps or with a cargo net or drawstraps.

▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargostraps.Cargo straps, cargo netting, retainingstraps or draw straps on the lashing eyes inthe cargo area.

Roof-mounted luggage rackInformationInstallation only possible with roof rack.Roof racks are available as special accessories.

SecuringFollow the installation instructions of the roofrack.

LoadingBecause roof-mounted luggage racks raise thevehicle's center of gravity when loaded, theyhave a major effect on vehicle handling andsteering response.Therefore, note the following when loadingand driving:▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicleweight.

▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐tained for tilting and opening the glasssunroof.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.▷ The roof load should not extend past the

loading area.▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the

bottom.▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for exam‐

ple, tie with ratchet straps.▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.

▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ation and braking maneuvers. Take cornersgently.

Seite 203

Loading Driving tips


Saving fuelVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

General informationYour vehicle contains advanced technology forthe reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐sions.Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ferent factors.Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐erate driving style and regular maintenance,can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ronmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargoAdditional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached partsfollowing useRemove roof-mounted luggage racks whichare no longer required following use.Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glasssunroofDriving with the glass sunroof and windowsopen results in increased air resistance andthereby reduces the range.

TiresGeneral informationTires can affect fuel consumption in variousways, for example, tire size may influence fuelconsumption.

Check the tire inflation pressureregularlyCheck and, if needed, correct the tire inflationpressure at least twice a month and beforestarting on a long trip.Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐sistance and thus raises fuel consumption andtire wear.

Drive away immediatelyDo not wait for the engine to warm-up whilethe vehicle remains stationary. Start drivingright away, but at moderate engine speeds.This is the quickest way of warming the coldengine up to operating temperature.

Look well ahead whendrivingAvoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐cle driving ahead of you.Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuelconsumption.

Seite 204

Driving tips Saving fuel


Avoid high engine speedsAs a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowersfuel consumption and reduces wear.If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator ofthe vehicle, refer to page 101.

Use coastingWhen approaching a red light, take your footoff the accelerator and let the vehicle coast toa halt.For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐erator and let the vehicle roll.The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.The high-voltage battery is being charged.

Regular chargingCharge the vehicle as often as possible at acharging facility. This will further reduce fuelconsumption due to the use of electrical en‐ergy.

Switch off the engine duringlonger stopsSwitch off the engine during longer stops, forexample, at traffic lights, railroad crossings orin traffic congestion.

Switch off any functions thatare not currently neededFunctions such as seat heating and the rearwindow defroster require a lot of energy andreduce the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.Switch off these functions if they are notneeded.The ECO PRO driving program supports theenergy conserving use of comfort features.

These functions are automatically deactivatedpartially or completely.

Have maintenance carriedoutHave vehicles maintained regularly to achieveoptimal vehicle efficiency and service life.BMW recommends that maintenance work beperformed by a BMW dealer’s service center.For information on the BMW MaintenanceSystem, refer to page 243.

ECO PROThe conceptECO PRO supports a driving style that saveson fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐mate control output, are adjusted.Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐matically decoupled from the transmission inthe D selector lever position and the engine isswitched off. Selector lever position D remainsengaged.In addition, context-sensitive instructions aredisplayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐sumption driving style.

Overview


Seite 205

Saving fuel Driving tips


The system includes the followingEfficientDynamics functions and displays:▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to

page 207.▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

page 206.

Activate ECO PROPress button repeatedly until ECOPRO is displayed in the instrument

cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO

Via the Driving Dynamics Control1. Activate ECO PRO.2. "Configure ECO PRO"3. Configure the program.

Via the iDrive1. "Settings"2. "ECO PRO mode"With respective equipment:

1. "Settings"2. "Driving mode"3. "Configure ECO PRO"Configure the program.

ECO PRO Tip▷ "Tip at:":

Adjust the ECO PRO speed.▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":

The output is reduced once the set ECOPRO speed is reached.

ECO PRO climate control"ECO PRO climate control"Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or

cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumptioncan be economized.The mirror heating is made available when out‐side temperatures are very cold.

ECO PRO potentialShows potential savings with the current set‐tings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

Efficiency displayDisplay in the instrument cluster

A mark in the efficiency display informs aboutthe current driving style.Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐celerating.Your driving style's efficiency is shown by thebar's color:▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long

as the mark moves within the blue range.▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by

backing off the accelerator pedal.The display switches to blue as soon as allconditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized drivingare met.

Seite 206

Driving tips Saving fuel


ECO PRO tip, driving tipThe arrow indicates that the drivingstyle can be adjusted to be more fuelefficient by backing off the accelerator

for instance.

ECO PRO tip, symbolsAn additional symbol and text instructions aredisplayed.

Symbol Measure

For efficient driving back off the ac‐celerator or delay accelerating to al‐low time to assess road conditions.

Reduce speed to the selected ECOPRO speed.

Steptronic transmission: shift fromM/S to D.

Indications on the Control Display

Displaying EfficientDynamics infoInformation on fuel consumption and technol‐ogy can be displayed while driving.

1. "Vehicle info"2. "EfficientDynamics"

Displaying EfficientDynamics infoThe current efficiency can be displayed.

"EfficientDynamics info"The following systems are displayed:▷ Auto Start/Stop function.▷ Energy recovery.▷ Climate control output.

Display ECO PRO tips "ECO PRO tips"


Seite 207

Saving fuel Driving tips



MobilityIn order to always ensure your mobility, you will

find important information on operating fluids,wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside

Assistance in the following.


Charging vehicleVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

The conceptThe vehicle can be charged using variouscharging cables at charging stations or hous‐hold sockets. Control and monitoring of thecharging process are handled completely au‐tomatically. The charge current strength canbe set by means of the Control Display.

General informationHigh-voltage batteryThe high-voltage battery is used as an energyaccumulator. The high-voltage battery can becharged by energy recovery during the trip orvia the power grid. In order to operate the high-voltage batteryoptimally, charge the vehicle regularly andcompletely on a compatible charger.When charging via the power grid, you canchose between the following variants.▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐

tion.Level 1 charging is possible via a householdsocket with a voltage of 120 volts.

For optimal use of the energy from the powermains, charging at a charging station, for ex‐ample, BMW Wallbox, is recommended.

Charge currentThe charge current strength is indicated in am‐peres.The vehicle cannot automatically detect themaximum permissible charge current strengthof the power grid during charging via a house‐hold socket or charging station.

Level 1 chargingPrior to the first Level 1 charging at your ownhousehold socket, as well as when charging atexternal electrical power sockets in Level 1,the allowed charge current strength must bedetermined, for example by a qualified electri‐cian.The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐ing, refer to page 215, can be adjusted in thevehicle in three steps.At delivery, the charge current forLevel 1 charging is set to "Low".Depending on the country-specific version,one of three ampere ratings is printed on theLevel 1 charging cable. This ampere rating isthe limit which must be adhered to for the vehi‐cle if the charge current is set to "Maximum".According to the market-specific version, thecharge current strength changes differently ifthe setting "Reduced" or "Low" is selected.

"Maximum" "Reduced" "Low"

8 A 6 A 6 A

10 A 7.5 A 6 A

12 A 9 A 6 A

15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A

Seite 210

Mobility Charging vehicle


Depending on the charge current, the chargingduration changes.

Maintaining charging stateShould it be necessary, for example, to con‐serve the electrical range for a later point intime on the trip, the current charging state ofthe high-voltage battery can be maintainedand/or increased with SAVE BATTERY, referto page 76.

InformationWARNINGImproper working with electrical current

can lead to an electric shock due to high vol‐tages or high currents. There is risk of fire ordanger to life. Observe the safety regulationswhen working with electrical current.◀

WARNINGA faulty and incorrectly designed charg‐

ing device at the charging location can causedamage to the vehicle and overload the powermains at the charging location. There is risk offire and risk of injuries. Have the followingcomponents of the own charging devicechecked at the charging location by a qualifiedelectrician prior to the first charging process:▷ Charging connection on the vehicle.▷ Charging cable.▷ Charging station.▷ Household socket and connected cir‐

cuits.◀WARNINGDamaged or worn charging devices, for

example worn contacts, can heat up. There isrisk of fire. Only use charging devices in properstate.◀

WARNINGIf sufficient safety distances are not

maintained, simultaneous charging and fillingwith fuel can cause a risk of fire with easilyflammable materials. There is risk of injuries orrisk of property damage. Do not fill the vehiclewith fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀

WARNINGContact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. High voltage is applied at thecharging connection. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. The manufacturer of your vehi‐cle recommends that work on the chargingconnection, for example cleaning, be per‐formed only by an authorized BMWi dealer'sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.◀

Charging cableGeneral informationUse a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 chargingcable or the permanently installed charging ca‐ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle.Different charging cables can be required de‐pending on the country.

InformationWARNINGNon-compatible charging cables or un‐

suitable charging stations can heat up andcause damage to the vehicle. There is risk offire. Use charging cables or charging stationsfor charging that are suitable for the respectivevehicle type.For information about suitable charging cables,contact a dealer's service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.◀

Seite 211

Charging vehicle Mobility


WARNINGImproper use of the charging cable can

prevent charging and lead to damage, for ex‐ample cable fire. There is risk of fire. Use thecharging cable only for charging the vehicle,and do not extend it using cables or adapt‐ers.◀

WARNINGDamaged charging cable can heat up or

an electric shock can occur. There is risk of fireor risk of injuries. Use undamaged charging ca‐bles only.◀

Level 1 charging cableWith the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissi‐ble to perform charging from grounded house‐hold sockets. At the power connection of ahousehold socket, charging is done with alter‐nating current.When a Level 1 charging cable is used, thismay produce efficiency values other than indi‐cated on the energy label.

Level 2 charging cableThe Level 2 charging cable makes it possibleto recharge at sockets of designatedLevel 2 charging stations using a special plug.Charging is performed with alternating currentat designated Level 2 charging stations. Thecharging process can be completed faster thanat household sockets.A charging current strength of up to maxi‐mum 16A is possible.If necessary, the charging cable is attached tothe charging station.

StorageStore the charging cable safely in the vehicleafter use.If required, store the charging cable with theinstalled plug cover to prevent moisture in thecharging cable plug.

Connection

Connecting the charging cableTo connect, engage selector lever in position Pand unlock the vehicle. Set the parking brake ifneeded.

1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.

2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug ifneeded.

3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to thehousehold socket or Level 2 charging ca‐ble to the port on the charging station.

4. Insert the charging cable plug correspond‐ing to the charging socket, and push it inuntil it latches.

RemoveWhen the vehicle is locked, the charging cableis locked. Unlock the vehicle before removingthe cable.If necessary, clean the area between chargingsocket flap and charging socket, for examplefrom snow, before removing it.

1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it islocked.Charging cable is unlocked.

2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐row 1, and grasp the charging cable at thegripping areas.

Seite 212



Charging process is interrupted.

3. Remove the charging cable from thecharging socket, arrow 2.

4. Put the charging socket lid back on.5. Close the charging socket flap.6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug if

needed.7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from

the household socket or Level 2 chargingcable from the port on the charging stationas needed.

8. Stow the charging cable.At a charging station, insert the perma‐nently installed charging cable in the placeprovided for it.Always keep charging socket clean andunobstructed.

Manual releaseThe charging cable may be locked during thecharging process if the vehicle is locked.

Manual unlocking of the chargingcableIn case of an electrical malfunction, the charg‐ing cable can be manually unlocked.

1. Open the hood.

2. Pull the blue knob. Charging cable ismanually unlocked.

3. Removing the charging cable, refer topage 212.

Charging processInformation

WARNINGImproper use of the power mains con‐

nection can lead to damage, for example cablefire. There is risk of injuries or risk of propertydamage. Use the charging cable only forcharging the vehicle, and do not extend it us‐ing cables or adapters.◀

WARNINGIf the charge current strength is adjusted

incorrectly, the power mains of the householdsocket can be overloaded and overheat. Thereis risk of fire. Adjust the charge currentstrength to the power mains prior to chargingon household sockets. With unknown powernetworks, set on the lowest level.◀

Starting charging process1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the

parking brake if needed.2. Planning charging process, refer to

page 214.3. Switch off drive readiness.

Seite 213



4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to thehousehold socket or Level 2 charging ca‐ble to the port on the charging station.

5. Open charging socket flap.6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, re‐

fer to page 212.7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.At high temperatures, initially the high-voltagebattery is cooled. The charging process can bestarted with a delay.

Display of the charging statusThe charging status is indicated by the indica‐tor light at the charging socket.

▷ Lamp white: charging cable can be con‐nected or removed.

▷ Lamp flashes yellow: charging process isbeing initialized.

▷ Lamp blue: charging process is started at aset time.

▷ Lamp flashes blue: charging process ac‐tive.

▷ Lamp flashes red: fault in the chargingprocess.

▷ Lamp green: charging process completed.When the vehicle is locked, the indicator lampgoes out after some time.When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indica‐tor lamp flashes continuously. The other indi‐cator lights go out after some time.To check the charging process, press the key on the remote control. The charging status

is indicated on the indicator lamp. In somecases the vehicle is locked.Additional messages regarding the chargingstatus, for example, probable end of chargingor the planned departure time, can be dis‐played in the instrument cluster, on the ControlDisplay and via the BMW Remote App on thesmartphone.

Planning charging processThe charging process can be adapted to con‐straints, for example, the cost of electricity.The vehicle can control the charging processin such a way that the charging process iscompleted at the departure time. A departuretime must be set for this purpose, refer topage 216.The following settings are available:▷ Immediate charging.▷ Set time window for favorable charging.▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable.If drive readiness is switched off, changes canbe made on the Control Display. Settings forstationary climate control and charging proc‐ess are accepted for planned departure timestoo.

Immediate chargingThe charging process starts as soon as thecharging cable is connected.

1. "Settings"2. "Charging"3. "Charge immediately"

Setting time window for favorablechargingWhen departure time is set, a time window forcharging with a favorable electricity rate can beset.

1. "Settings"2. "Charging"

Seite 214



3. "Low cost charging"4. Set rate begin. Turn the Controller until the

desired time is set and press the Control‐ler.

5. Set rate end. Turn the Controller until thedesired time is set and press the Control‐ler.

In order to charge and possibly air-conditionthe vehicle completely by the departure time,the charging process can be started even be‐fore the selected time window or ended afterthe selected time window.

Setting charging via aLevel 1 charging cableDepending on the electrical mains, the vehiclemust be charged with a different charging cur‐rent strength, refer to page 210.

1. "Settings"2. "Charging"3. "AC charging power:"Settings are stored. When you change charg‐ing locations you also might need to changethe setting for charging.Set the charge current strength at otherhousehold sockets to "Low".

Stopping charging processThe charging process can be stopped at anytime by removing the charging cable and con‐tinued at a later time by connecting the charg‐ing cable in order to use other loads on thepower connection or to prevent simultaneoushigh power from multiple loads.Removing the charging cable, refer topage 212.

Continuing the charging processIf the charging process is interrupted, for ex‐ample, through a temporary power failure, thecharging process is automatically continuedafter the interruption.

Terminating charging process1. Removing the charging cable from the ve‐

hicle, refer to page 212.2. Stow the charging cable as required.3. Close the charging socket flap.4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.

Displays in the instrumentclusterThe charging state indicator light, refer topage 92, shows the charging state of the high-voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if op‐erating readiness is switched on. If all seg‐ments are filled, the high-voltage battery isfully charged.Even if no segments are filled, the high-voltagesystem is still under high voltage.Information regarding the charging process areshown on the charging screen, refer topage 91.

Display Meaning

Blue plug: charging process activeor completed.White plug: charging interruption.

End of charging time or set depar‐ture time.

Charging progress bar.

Indicator in blue: charged electricalrange.

Indicator in white: maximum electri‐cal range.

Departure time set.

Seite 215



Display Meaning

Climate control activated at depar‐ture time.

Flashing: ventilation active.

Flashing: heating active.

Flashing: cooling active.

Departure timeThe conceptFor optimum range and climate control, thedeparture time can be set before parking thecar.With a set departure time, the vehicle is cli‐mate controlled during the charging processwhen climate control is set. Climate controloutput is reduced during the trip. This in‐creases the range during electric driving.The following settings are possible at depar‐ture time:▷ Climate control at departure time.▷ Planning of up to two regular departure

times.If drive readiness is switched off, changes canbe made on the Control Display. Settings forclimate control and charging process are alsoapplied for scheduled departure times.

Climate control at departure time1. "Settings"2. "Departure time"3. "Precond. for departure"

Setting departure time1. "Settings"2. "Departure time"3. "Departure 1:"4. Set the time.

Turn the Controller until the desired time isset and press the Controller.

Up to two departure times can be set.

Activating the departure time1. "Settings"2. "Departure time"

Set departure times are displayed.3. E. g. "Activate depart. time 1"Up to two departure times can be activated.The set departure time will be deactivated, ifthe departure time was ignored three times ina row.

Climate controlGeneral informationThe following settings for climate control ofthe vehicle are possible:▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐

ately, refer to page 178.With stationary climate control activatedand no charging cable connected, therange is reduced.

▷ Planned climate control at the set depar‐ture time, refer to page 179.

Discharged high-voltage andvehicle batteryGeneral informationIn addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve‐hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐

Seite 216



quired for operation of the onboard electron‐ics.If the high-voltage battery is discharged andthe combustion engine is started, air condi‐tioning may be limited.With a discharged vehicle battery, no operationof the vehicle is possible.

Place vehicle in serviceIf the battery is discharged, an engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicleand two jumper cables, see Jump-starting, re‐fer to page 252.

Seite 217



RefuelingVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

InformationObserve the fuel recommendation, refer topage 221, prior to refueling.

CAUTIONWith a range of less than 30 miles/50 km

it is possible that the engine will no longer havesufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐sured anymore. There is risk of property dam‐age. Refuel promptly.◀

To also ensure all engine functions under un‐favorable conditions, for example steep vehicleinclinations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuelshould be refueled.



Tank ventThe conceptThe vehicle is equipped with a special fueltank. It is designed for special requirements

that arise with the hybrid operation of the vehi‐cle, for example, alternating drive with com‐bustion engine or electric motor.

General informationIn the fuel tank, excess pressure can build updue to gasoline vapors which are dissipatedbefore the fuel cap is opened.

OverviewThe button is located on the driver's floor area.

Tank venting1. Switch off drive readiness.

2. Press button to start the pressureequalization.The status of the tank venting is displayedin the instrument cluster. In rare cases, thetank venting can last several minutes.If the tank venting has been completed, amessage is displayed in the instrumentcluster. The fuel cap is released for open‐ing.

3. Open the fuel filler flap.If the fuel filler flap is not opened within 10minutes after the fuel filler flap was re‐leased, the fuel filler flap relocks. Pressbutton again.

Fuel capOpeningBefore opening , vent the tank, refer topage 218.

Seite 218

Mobility Refueling


1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel fillerflap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attachedto the fuel filler flap.

Closing1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.2. Close the fuel filler flap.

WARNINGThe retaining strap of the fuel cap be

jammed and crushed during closing. In thiscase, the lid cannot be correctly closed andfuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of

injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐tion that the retaining strap is not jammed orcrushed when closing the lid.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flapE. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.The release is located in the cargo area.

1. Open the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pumpsymbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel fillerflap. Fuel filler flap is opened.

4. Carefully open the fuel filler flap. Excesspressure can build up in the fuel tank fromgasoline vapor.

5. Fuel the vehicle as usual. This may be diffi‐cult due to the residue pressure in thetank, caused by frequent stopping of thefuel pump nozzle, for example.

Seite 219

Refueling Mobility


Observe the following whenrefueling



CAUTIONFuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐

ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐age may occur to these surfaces. Theenvironment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicksoff the first time.Observe safety regulations posted at the gasstation.

Seite 220

Mobility Refueling


FuelVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Fuel recommendationGeneral informationDepending on the region, many gas stationssell fuel that has been customized to winter orsummer conditions. Fuel that is available inwinter helps make a cold start easier, for exam‐ple.

InformationCAUTIONEven fuels that conform to the specifica‐

tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐gine problems, for instance poor engine start-up behavior, poor handling and/or poorperformance. There is risk of property damage.In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐tions or use a brand name fuel with a higheroctane rating.◀

GasolineFor the best fuel efficiency, the gasolineshould be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐tent.Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐taining metal must not be used.

CAUTIONEven small amounts of wrong fuel or

wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalyticconverter is permanently damaged. There isrisk of property damage. Do not refuel or addthe following in the case of gasoline engines:▷ Leaded gasoline.▷ Metallic additives, for example manganese

or iron.Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.Ethanol should satisfy the following qualitystandards:US: ASTM 4806–xxCAN: CGSB-3.511–xxxx: comply with the current standard in eachcase.

CAUTIONWrong fuels can damage the fuel system

and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanolpercentage than recommended or one withother types of alcohol, for example M5 toM100.◀

Recommended fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel gradeBMW recommends AKI 89.

Seite 221

Fuel Mobility


CAUTIONFuel that does not comply with the mini‐

mum quality can compromise engine functionor cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does notcomply with the minimum quality.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ing, the engine may produce knocking soundswhen starting at high outside temperatures.This has no effect on the engine life.

CAUTIONThe use of poor-quality fuels may result

in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ronmental conditions such as high ambienttemperature and high altitude, may occur.If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ommend switching to a high quality gasolinebrand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐gine deposits, it is highly recommended topurchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.Failure to comply with these recommendationsmay result in the need for unscheduled main‐tenance.◀

Seite 222

Mobility Fuel


Wheels and tiresVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Tire inflation pressureSafety informationThe tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐sure influence the following:▷ The service life of the tires.▷ Road safety.▷ Driving comfort.

Checking the tire inflation pressureWARNINGA tire with low or missing tire inflation

pressure impacts handling, such as steeringand braking response. There is risk of an acci‐dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐sure, and correct it as needed, for exampletwice a month and before a long trip.◀

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐flation pressure.Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐tion pressure increases along with the tire'stemperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐fications relate to cold tires or tires with theambient temperature.Only check the tire inflation pressure when thetires are cold. This means after driving no more

than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least 2 hours.The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tireinflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat TireMonitor.For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting thetire inflation pressure, reset the Tire PressureMonitor.

Tire inflation pressure specificationsThe tire inflation pressure table, refer topage 224, contains all tire inflation pressurespecifications for the specified tire sizes at theambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐sure values apply to tire sizes approved by themanufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicletype.To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,please note the following:▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to100 mph/160 km/hFor speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and foroptimum driving comfort, note the pressurevalues in the tire inflation pressure table, referto page 224, and adjust as necessary.

Seite 223

Wheels and tires Mobility


These pressure values can also be found onthe tire inflation pressure label on the driver'sdoor pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressure values up to100 mph/160 km/h

X5 xDrive40e

Tire size Pressure specificationsin bar/PSI

Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires

255/55 R 18 109 HM+S XL A/S RSC255/55 R 18 109 HM+S XL RSC

2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41


2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

Front: 255/50 R 19107 W XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19111 W XL RSC

- 2.8 / 41


2.5 / 36 -


Rear: 315/35 R 20110 W XL RSC

- 2.8 / 41

Front: 275/40 R 20106 V M+S XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20110 V M+S XL RSC

- 2.8 / 41

Front: 285/35 R 21105 Y XL RSC

2.5 / 36 -

Rear: 325/30 R 21108 Y XL RSC

- 3.0 / 44

Emergency wheel:T 155/90 D 18 113MT 155/80 R 19 114M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

Tire inflation pressures at max.speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

WARNINGIn order to drive at maximum speeds in

excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures forspeeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from therelevant table on the following pages. Other‐wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀

Seite 224

Mobility Wheels and tires


Tire inflation pressure values over100 mph/160 km/h

X5 xDrive40e


Specifications inbar/PSI with coldtires


2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45


2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48


2.8 / 41 -

Rear: 285/45 R 19111 W XL RSC

- 3.0 / 44


2.8 / 41 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20110 W XL RSC

- 3.0 / 44

Front: 275/40 R 20106 V M+S XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -

Rear: 315/35 R 20110 V M+S XL RSC

- 3.2 / 46

Front: 285/35 R 21105 Y XL RSC

2.8 / 41 -


Rear: 325/30 R 21108 Y XL RSC

- 3.2 / 46

Emergency wheel:T 155/90 D 18 113MT 155/80 R 19 114M

Speed up to a max. of50 mph / 80 km/h4.2 / 60

Tire identification marksTire size245/45 R 18 96 Y245: nominal width in mm45: aspect ratio in %R: radial tire code18: rim diameter in inches96: load rating, not for ZR tiresY: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letterQ = up to 100 mph, 160 km/hR = up to 106 mph, 170 km/hS = up to 112 mph, 180 km/hT = up to 118 mph, 190 km/hH = up to 131 mph, 210 km/hV = up to 150 mph, 240 km/hW = up to 167 mph, 270 km/hY = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification NumberDOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3615xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brandxxx: tire size and tire design3615: tire age

Seite 225



Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines ofthe U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire ageDOT … 3615: the tire was manufactured in the36th week 2015.

RecommendationRegardless of wear and tear, replace tires atleast every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;Temperature A

DOT Quality GradesTreadwearTraction AA A B CTemperature A B CAll passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐eral Safety Requirements in addition to thesegrades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g,times as well on the government course as atire graded 100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart signifi‐cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ing habits, service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TemperatureThe temperature grades are A, the highest, B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C correspondsto a level of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades BandA represent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐quired by law.

WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.◀

RSC – Run-flat tiresRun-flat tires, refer to page 229, are labeledwith a circular symbol containing the lettersRSC marked on the sidewall.

M+SWinter and all-season tires with better coldweather performance than summer tires.

Seite 226



Tire treadSummer tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.12 inches/3 mm.There is an increased danger of hydroplaning ifthe tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐ches/3 mm.

Winter tiresDo not drive with a tire tread depth of less than0.16 inches/4 mm.Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tiresare less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around thetire's circumference and have the legally re‐quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐ches/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire withTWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damageGeneral informationInspect your tires regularly for damage, foreignobjects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

InformationDriving over rough or damaged road surfaces,as well as debris, curbs and other obstaclescan cause serious damage to wheels, tires and

suspension parts. This is more likely to occurwith low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ioning between the wheel and the road. Becareful to avoid road hazards and reduce yourspeed, especially if your vehicle is equippedwith low-profile tires.Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐functions:▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving overcurbs, road damage, or similar things.

WARNINGDamaged tires can lose tire inflation

pressure, which can lead to loss of vehiclecontrol. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tireschecked. For this purpose, drive carefully tothe nearest dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop. Havevehicle towed or transported as needed.◀

WARNINGDamaged tires can lose tire inflation

pressure, which can lead to loss of vehiclecontrol. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀

Changing wheels and tiresMountingHave mounting and wheel balancing carriedout by a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combinationYou can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shopabout the right wheel/tire combination andwheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Seite 227



Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impairthe function of a variety of systems such asABS or DSC.To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐figuration from a single manufacturer.Following tire damage, have the original wheeland tire combination remounted on the vehicleas soon as possible.

WARNINGWheels and tires which are not suitable

for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐cle, e.g. due to contact with the body due totolerances despite the same official size rating.There is risk of an accident. The manufacturerof your vehicle strongly suggests that you usewheels and tires that have been recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicletype.◀

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, BMW recommends certaintire brands. These can be identified by a staron the tire sidewall.

New tiresTire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;they achieve their full traction potential after abreak-in time.Drive conservatively for the first200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tiresThe manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ommend the use of retreaded tires.

WARNINGRetreaded tires can have different tire

casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle doesnot recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀

Winter tiresWinter tires are recommended for operating onwinter roads.Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐vide better winter traction than summer tires,they do not provide the same level of perform‐ance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tiresIf the maximum speed of the vehicle is higherthan the permissible speed for the winter tires,then a respective symbol is displayed in yourfield of vision. The label is available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.With mounted winter tires, observe and adhereto the permissible maximum speed.

Run-flat tiresIf you are already using run-flat tires, for yourown safety you should replace them only withthe same kind. No spare tire is available in thecase of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐ble from a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axlesDifferent wear patterns can occur on the frontand rear axles depending on individual drivingconditions. The tires can be rotated betweenthe axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐ter or another qualified service center or repair

Seite 228



shop. After rotating, check the tire pressureand correct if needed.Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐missible on vehicles with different tire sizes orrim sizes on the front and rear axles.

StorageStore wheels and tires in a cool, dry place withas little exposure to light as possible.Always protect tires against all contact with oil,grease and fuels.Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tiresLabel

RSC label on the tire sidewall.The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐cial rims.The support of the sidewall allows the tire toremain drivable to a restricted degree in theevent of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued drivingwith a flat tire.

Changing run-flat tiresFor your own safety, only use run-flat tires. Nospare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.A dealer’s service center will be glad to answeradditional questions at any time.

Repairing a flat tireSafety measures▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible

from passing traffic and on solid ground.▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by

setting the parking brake.▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐side the immediate area in a safe place,such as behind a guardrail.

▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at anappropriate distance.

Mobility SystemThe conceptWith the Mobility System, minor tire damagecan be sealed temporarily to enable continuedtravel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumpedinto the tires, which seals the damage from theinside.The compressor can be used to check the tireinflation pressure.

Information▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor andsealant container.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐tive if the tire puncture measures approx.1/8 inches/4 mm or more.

▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repairshop if the tire cannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodiesthat have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealantcontainer and apply it to the steeringwheel.

Seite 229



▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPMwheel electronics. In this case, have theelectronics checked at the next opportu‐nity and have them replaced if needed.

DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐

tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases canenter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐haust gases can also accumulate outside ofthe vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep theexhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐tion.◀

StorageThe Mobility System is located behind the leftside trim in the cargo area.

Sealant container

▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 Holder for bottle2 Compressor3 Connector/cable for socket4 Connection hose5 On/off switch6 Inflation pressure dial7 Reduce inflation pressure

Filling the tire with sealant1. Shake the sealant container.

2. Pull the connection hose fully out of thecompressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

Seite 230



3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐nector of the sealant container.

4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐pressor housing in an upright position.

5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworkingwheel.

6. With the compressor switched off, insertthe plug into the power socket inside thevehicle.

7. With operating readiness or drive readi‐ness switched on, switch on the compres‐sor.

CAUTIONThe compressor can overheat during ex‐

tended operation. There is risk of propertydamage. Do not run the compressor for morethan 10 min.◀

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve atire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.While the tire is being filled with sealant, thetire inflation pressure may sporadically reachapprox. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐sor at this point.If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is notreached:

1. Switch off the compressor.2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.

Seite 231



3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐tribute the sealant in the tire.

4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot bereached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐ter or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

Stowing the Mobility System1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐

tainer from the wheel.2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐

pressor from the sealant container.3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐

tainer previously connected to the tirevalve with the available connector on thesealant container.This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐ing from the container.

4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐ble material to avoid dirtying the cargoarea.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐cle.

Distributing the sealantImmediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in thetire.Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.If possible, do not drive at speeds less than12 mph/20 km/h.

To correct the tire inflation pressure1. Stop at a suitable location.2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐

pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.3. Insert the connector into the power socket

inside the vehicle.4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to

2.5 bar.

▷ Increase pressure: with operating read‐iness or drive readiness switched on,switch on the compressor.

▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ton on the compressor.

Continuing the tripDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 mph/80 km/h.Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.Replace the nonworking tire and the sealantcontainer of the Mobility System as soon aspossible.

Snow chainsFine-link snow chainsThe manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsuse of fine-link snow chains. Certain types offine-link snow chains have been tested by themanufacturer of the vehicle and recommendedas road-safe and suitable.Information regarding suitable snow chains isavailable from a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.

UseUse only in pairs on the rear wheels, equippedwith the tires of the following size:▷ 255/55 R 18.▷ 255/50 R 19.Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐tions.Make sure that the snow chains are alwayssufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐structions.Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.

Seite 232



Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor aftermounting snow chains, as doing so may resultin incorrect readings.When driving with snow chains, briefly activateDynamic Traction Control if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chainsDo not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/hwhen using snow chains.

Seite 233



Engine compartmentVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


Important features in the engine comp.

1 Washer fluid reservoir2 Vehicle identification number3 Oil filler neck4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

5 Manual unlocking, charging cable6 Coolant reservoir, engine7 Coolant reservoir, high-voltage technology8 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

HoodInformation

WARNINGImproperly executed work in the engine

compartment can damage vehicle compo‐nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a

risk of personal and property damage. Themanufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat, in the effort to avoid such risks, work inthe engine compartment be performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.◀

Seite 234

Mobility Engine compartment


WARNINGThe engine compartment accommo‐

dates moving components. Certain compo‐nents in the engine compartment can alsomove with the vehicle switched off, for exam‐ple the cooler fan. There is risk of injuries. Donot reach into the area of moving parts. Keeparticles of clothing and hair away from movingparts.◀

WARNINGThere are protruding parts, for example

lock hook, on the inside of the hood. There isrisk of injuries. If the hood is open, pay atten‐tion to protruding parts and keep these areasclear.◀

WARNINGAn incorrectly locked hood can open

while driving and restrict visibility. There is riskof an accident. Stop immediately and correctlyclose the hood.◀

WARNINGBody parts can be jammed on opening

and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.Make sure that the area of movement of thehood is clear during opening and closing.◀

CAUTIONFolded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is risk ofproperty damage. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before opening thehood.◀

Opening the hood1. Pull the lever.

2. Press the release handle and open thehood.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

Seite 235

Engine compartment Mobility


Closing the hood

Let the hood drop from a height of approx.16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock itfully.The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

Seite 236

Mobility Engine compartment


Engine oilVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

General informationThe engine oil consumption is dependent onthe driving style and driving conditions.The engine oil consumption can increase inthe following situations, for example:▷ Sporty driving style.▷ Break-in of the engine.▷ Idling of the engine.▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐

fied as not suitable.Therefore, regularly check the engine oil levelafter refueling.The vehicle is equipped with electronic oilmeasurement.The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐uring principles:▷ Status display.▷ Detailed measurement.

Electronic oil measurementStatus display

The conceptThe engine oil level is monitored electronicallywhile driving and shown on the Control Dis‐play.If the engine oil level reaches the minimumlevel, a check control message is displayed.

RequirementsA current measured value is available after ap‐prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shortertrip, the status of the last, sufficiently long tripis displayed.With frequent short-distance trips, regularlyperform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil levelAbout iDrive:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Engine oil level"The engine oil level is displayed.

Engine oil level display messagesDifferent messages appear on the display de‐pending on the engine oil level. Pay attentionto these messages.If the engine oil level is too low, within the next125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer topage 238.

CAUTIONA too low engine oil level causes engine

damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐mediately add engine oil.◀

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Seite 237

Engine oil Mobility


CAUTIONToo much engine oil can damage the en‐

gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk ofproperty damage. Do not add too much engineoil. When too much engine oil is added, haveoil level corrected by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.◀

Detailed measurement

The conceptIn the detailed measurement the engine oillevel is checked when the vehicle is stationary,and displayed via a scale.If the engine oil level reaches the minimumlevel, a check control message is displayed.During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐creased somewhat.

Requirements▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.▷ Drive readiness is established.▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in

selector lever position N or P and accelera‐tor pedal not depressed.

▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐perature.

Performing a detailed measurementIn order to perform a detailed measurement ofthe engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle info"2. "Vehicle status"3. "Measure engine oil level"4. "Start measurement"The engine oil level is checked and displayedvia a scale.Time: approx. 1 minute.

Adding engine oilInformation

WARNINGOperating materials, for example oils,

greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmfulingredients. There is risk of injuries or dangerto life. Observe the instructions on the contain‐ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,skin or eyes with operating materials. Do notrefill operating materials into different bottles.Store operating materials out of reach of chil‐dren.◀

CAUTIONA too low engine oil level causes engine

damage. There is risk of property damage.Add engine oil within the next125 miles/200 km.◀

CAUTIONToo much engine oil can damage the en‐

gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk ofproperty damage. Do not add too much engineoil. When too much engine oil is added, haveoil level corrected by a dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.◀

General informationOnly add engine oil when the message is dis‐played in the instrument cluster. The quantityto be added is indicated in the message dis‐played in the instrument cluster.Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐cle before engine oil is added.Take care not to add too much engine oil.

OverviewThe oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐partment, refer to page 234.

Seite 238

Mobility Engine oil


Opening the oil filler neck1. Opening the hood, refer to page 2352. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise.

3. Add engine oil.

Engine oil types to addInformation

CAUTIONOil additives can damage the engine.

There is risk of property damage. Do not useoil additives.◀

CAUTIONIncorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐

tions in the engine or damage it. There is riskof property damage. When selecting an engineoil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐rect viscosity grade.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life ofthe engine.

Viscosity gradesGasoline engine:When selecting an engine oil, make sure thatthe engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. Alternatively, also en‐gine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20,SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 canbe used.The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.

More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.

Suitable engine oil typesYou can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ing oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

More information about suitable engine oil rat‐ings and viscosities of engine oils is availableat a dealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Alternative engine oil typesIf an engine oil suitable for continuous use isnot available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐gine oil with the following oil rating can beadded:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

API SL or superior oil rating.

Engine oil changeCAUTIONEngine oil that is not changed in timely

fashion can cause increased engine wear andthus engine damage. There is risk of propertydamage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐cated in the vehicle.◀

The vehicle manufacturer recommends thatyou have a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop changethe engine oil.

Seite 239

Engine oil Mobility


Seite 240

Mobility Engine oil


CoolantVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

InformationWARNINGWith the engine hot and the cooling sys‐

tem open, coolant can escape and lead toburns. There is risk of injuries. Only open thecooling system with the engine cooled down.◀

WARNINGAdditives are harmful and incorrect addi‐

tives can damage the engine. There is risk ofinjuries and risk of property damage. Avoid thecontact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes withadditives. Do not swallow any additives. Usesuitable additives only.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.Not all commercially available additives aresuitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐ice center or another qualified service center orrepair shop.

Coolant levelGeneral informationIf there is no Min. and Max. mark in the fillerneck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolantlevel checked if needed by a dealer’s service

center or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop and add coolant as needed.

OverviewThe vehicle features two cooling circuits. Al‐ways check the coolant levels of both coolantreservoirs and refill as needed.

Checking1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excesspressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐

tween the minimum and maximum marksin the filler neck.

Seite 241

Coolant Mobility


Adding1. Let the engine cool.2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly

counterclockwise to allow any excesspressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant upto the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Close cap.5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

DisposalComply with the relevant environmen‐tal protection regulations when dispos‐ing of coolant and coolant additives.

Seite 242

Mobility Coolant


MaintenanceVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

BMW maintenance systemThe maintenance system indicates requiredmaintenance measures, and thereby providessupport in maintaining road safety and the op‐erational reliability of the vehicle.In some cases scopes and intervals may varyaccording to the country-specific version. Re‐placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐rately. Further information is available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Condition Based ServiceCBSSensors and special algorithms take into ac‐count the driving conditions of your vehicle.Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐nizes the maintenance requirements.The system makes it possible to adapt theamount of maintenance corresponding to youruser profile.Detailed information on service requirements,refer to page 101, can be displayed on theControl Display.

Service data in the remote controlInformation on the required maintenance iscontinuously stored in the remote control. Thedealer’s service center can read this data outand suggest an optimized maintenance scopefor your vehicle.Therefore, hand the service advisor the remotecontrol with which the vehicle was driven mostrecently.

Storage periodsStorage periods during which the vehicle bat‐tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐count.If this occurs, have a dealer's service center oranother qualified service center or repair shopupdate the time-dependent maintenance pro‐cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, ifnecessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet for USmodels and Warranty andService Guide Booklet forCanadian modelsPlease consult your Service and Warranty In‐formation Booklet for US models and Warrantyand Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐els for additional information on service re‐quirements.The manufacturer of your vehicle recommendsthat maintenance and repair be performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop. Records of regu‐lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐tained.

Seite 243

Maintenance Mobility


Socket for OBD OnboardDiagnosisInformation

CAUTIONThe socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an

intricate component intended to be used inconjunction with specialized equipment tocheck the vehicle’s primary emissions system.Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐nosis, or contact with the socket for OnboardDiagnosis for other than its intended purpose,can cause vehicle malfunctions and createsrisks of personal and property damage. Giventhe foregoing, the manufacture of your vehiclestrongly recommends that access to thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to adealer's service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop or other personsthat have the specialized training and equip‐ment for purposes of properly utilizing thesocket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side forchecking the primary components in the vehi‐cle's emissions.

Emissions▷ The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Havethe vehicle checked as soon aspossible.

▷ The warning lamp flashes under certaincircumstances:This indicates that there is excessive mis‐firing in the engine.Reduce the vehicle speed and have thesystem checked immediately; otherwise,serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐riod can seriously damage emission con‐trol components, in particular the catalyticconverter.

Seite 244

Mobility Maintenance


Replacing componentsVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located underthe cargo floor panel.

Wiper blade replacementInformation

CAUTIONIf the wiper arm falls onto the windshield

without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐placing the wiper blades and do not fold downthe wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀

CAUTIONFolded-away wipers can be jammed

when the hood is opened. There is risk ofproperty damage. Make sure that the wiperswith the wiper blades mounted are foldeddown onto the windshield before opening thehood.◀

Replacing the front wiper blades1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer

to page 84, the wiper arms.2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐

shield.

3. Fold open the holder.

Seite 245

Replacing components Mobility


4. Slide wiper blade out of the wiper arm.

5. Insert the new wiper blade and press it onuntil it you hear it snap into the holder.

6. Fold down the wipers.

Replacing the rear wiper blade1. Fold up the wiper arm.2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3. Continue turning the wiper blade all theway so that it pops out of the holder.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the holderuntil you hear it snap into place.

5. Fold the wipers in.

Lamp and bulb replacementGeneral informationLights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐tion to vehicle safety.The manufacturer of the vehicle recommendsthat you have appropriate work performed by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop if you are unfami‐liar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Information

Lights and bulbsWARNINGBulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐

tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There isrisk of injuries. Only change bulbs after theyhave cooled off.◀

WARNINGWork on switched-on lighting systems

can cause short circuits. There is risk of inju‐ries or risk of property damage. When workingon the lighting system, switch off the lamps inquestion. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐turer's instructions.◀

CAUTIONDirty bulbs have a reduced service life.

There is risk of property damage. Do not holdnew bulbs with your bare hands. Use a cleancloth or something similar, or hold the bulb byits base.◀

Xenon headlightsDANGERThere can be high voltage in the lighting

system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐turer of your vehicle recommends that thework on the lighting system including bulb re‐placement be performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)Some items of equipment use light-emittingdiodes installed behind a cover as a lightsource.

Seite 246

Mobility Replacing components


These light-emitting diodes, which are relatedto conventional lasers, are officially designatedas Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

WARNINGToo intensive brightness can irritate or

damage the retina of the eye. There is risk ofinjuries. Do not look directly into the headlightsor other light sources. Do not remove the LEDcovers.◀

Headlight glassCondensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ternal lights in cool or humid weather. Whendriving with the lights switched on, the con‐densation evaporates after a short time. Theheadlight glass does not need to be changed.If despite driving with the lights switched on,increasing humidity forms, e. g. water dropletsin the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehiclerecommends having it checked by a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Headlight settingThe headlight adjustments can be affected bychanging lights and bulbs. After the headlightadjustment was changed, have it checked and,if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.

Front lights, bulb replacement

Xenon headlights

InformationDANGERThere can be high voltage in the lighting

system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐turer of your vehicle recommends that thework on the lighting system including bulb re‐placement be performed by a dealer’s servicecenter or another qualified service center or re‐pair shop.◀

Because of the long life of these bulbs, thelikelihood of failure is very low. Switching thelights on and off frequently shortens their life.If a bulb fails, turn on the front fog lamps andcontinue the trip with great care. Comply withlocal regulations.For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,contact a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher3 Turn signal

Xenon headlightsLow beams and high beams are designed withxenon technology.The parking lights and daylight running lightsare made using LED technology.In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

LED headlightsWith LED headlights, all front lights and sideindicators are designed with LED technology.If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lightsand continue the trip with great care. Complywith local regulations.In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.

Seite 247



Turn signal

InformationFollow general instructions, refer to page 246.

Replacement21-watt bulb, PY 21W.

1. Opening the hood, refer to page 2352. Unscrew the lid counterclockwise and re‐

move it carefully.The bulb is attached to the lid.

3. Turn the bulb clockwise to remove it.4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

the reverse order.

Turn signal in exterior mirrorThe turn signals in the exterior mirrors featureLED technology. In the case of a malfunction,contact a dealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop.

Front fog lights/cornering lights

InformationFollow general instructions, refer to page 246.

Replacement55-watt bulb, H11.

1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboardvehicle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip,arrow 1.

2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.3. Remove the front fog lamp toward the

front.4. Detach the connector.

5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.

6. Remove the bulb and replace it.7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front

fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.

Seite 248



LED front fog lightsThese front fog lights are made using LEDtechnology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

LED tail lightsThese tail lamps are made using LED technol‐ogy. In the case of a malfunction, contact adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Changing wheels/tiresInformationWhen using run-flat tires or sealants, a tiredoes not need to be changed immediately inthe event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.No spare tire is provided with your vehicle.The tools for changing wheels are available asaccessories from your dealer’s service centeror another qualified service center or repairshop.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐cated at the positions shown.

Vehicle batteryMaintenanceThe battery is maintenance-free.The added amount of acid is sufficient for theservice life of the battery.More information about the battery can be re‐quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐other qualified service center or repair shop.

Battery replacementCAUTIONVehicle batteries that are not compatible

can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐cle functions. There is a risk of personal andproperty damage. Only vehicle batteries thatare compatible with your vehicle type shouldbe installed in your vehicle. Information oncompatible vehicle batteries is available at yourdealer’s service center.◀

After a battery replacement, the manufacturerof your vehicle recommends that the vehiclebattery be registered on the vehicle by adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop to ensure that allcomfort features are fully available and that anyCheck Control messages of these comfort fea‐tures are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

General informationMake sure that the battery is always suffi‐ciently charged to guarantee that the batteryremains usable for its full service life.The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐lowing cases:▷ When making frequent short-distance

drives.▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a

month.

Seite 249



InformationCAUTIONBattery chargers for the vehicle battery

can work with high voltages and currents,which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐work can be overloaded or damaged. There isrisk of property damage. Only connect batterychargers for the vehicle battery to the startingaid terminals in the engine compartment.◀

Starting aid terminalsIn the vehicle, only charge the battery via thestarting aid terminals, refer to page 253, in theengine compartment with the engine off.

Power failureAfter a power loss, some equipment needs tobe newly initialized or individual settings up‐dated, for example:▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:

store the positions again.▷ Time: update.▷ Date: update.▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to

page 55.

Disposing of old batteriesHave old batteries disposed of by adealer’s service center or anotherqualified service center or repair shop

or take them to a collection point.Maintain the battery in an upright position fortransport and storage. Secure the battery sothat it does not tip over during transport.

FusesInformation

WARNINGIncorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is riskof fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀

Plastic tweezers and information on the fusetypes and locations are stored in the fuse boxin the cargo area.

In the car's interior

Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover.

In the cargo area

Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations isfound on a separate sheet.

Seite 250



Breakdown assistanceVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located in the center console.

Intelligent emergency callThe conceptIn case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐quest can be made through this system.

General informationOnly press the SOS button in an emergency.For technical reasons, the Emergency Requestcannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ditions.

Overview

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has

been activated.▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.▷ The Assist system is functional.

Initiating an Emergency Request1. Press the cover briefly to open it.2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the

button lights up green.▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency

Request was initiated.If a cancel prompt appears on the display,the Emergency Request can be aborted.If the situation allows, wait in your vehicleuntil the voice connection has been estab‐lished.

▷ The LED flashes green when a connectionto the BMW Response Center has beenestablished.When the Emergency Request is receivedat the BMW Response Center, the BMWResponse Center contacts you and takesfurther steps to help you.Even if you are unable to respond, theBMW Response Center can take further

Seite 251

Breakdown assistance Mobility


steps to help you under certain circum‐stances.For this, data are transmitted to the BMWResponse Center which serve to deter‐mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.the current position of the vehicle, if it canbe established.

▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMWResponse Center can no longer be heardvia the speaker, you can nevertheless stillbe heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency RequestautomaticallyUnder certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐fication is not affected by pressing the SOSbutton.

Warning triangle1. Open the cover on the left side trim.

2. Lift the warning triangle slightly and re‐move in the direction of the interior.

First-aid kitInformationSome of the articles have a limited service life.Check the expiration dates of the contentsregularly and replace any expired itemspromptly.

Storage1. Open the cover on the left side trim.

2. Remove the first-aid kit.

Jump-startingGeneral informationIf the battery is discharged, the engine can bestarted using the battery of another vehicleand two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Seite 252

Mobility Breakdown assistance


InformationDANGERContact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. Do not touch any componentsthat are under voltage.◀

To prevent personal injury or damage to bothvehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐dure.Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used forjump-starting.

PreparationCAUTIONIn the case of body contact between the

two vehicles, a short circuit can occur duringjump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀

1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltageinformation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/powerconsumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminalsWARNINGIf the jumper cables are connected in the

incorrect order, sparks formation can occur.There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to thecorrect order during connection.◀

The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐nal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as thebattery negative terminal.

Connecting the cablesCAUTIONSwapping the positive and negative ter‐

minals can permanently damage componentsof the hybrid system or the vehicle electronics.There is risk of property damage. Be carefulnot to swap the positive and negative termi‐nals. Take note of the label next to the positiveterminal.◀

1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aidterminal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positivejumper cable to the positive terminal of thebattery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐tance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other endof the cable to the positive terminal of the

Seite 253



battery, or to the corresponding startingaid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negativejumper cable to the negative terminal ofthe battery, or to the corresponding engineor body ground of assisting vehicle.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp to thenegative terminal of the battery, or to thecorresponding engine or body ground ofthe vehicle to be started.

Starting the engineNever use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicleand let it run for several minutes at an in‐creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to bestarted in the usual way.If the first starting attempt is not success‐ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐other attempt in order to allow the dis‐charged battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐

verse order.Check the battery and recharge if needed.

Tow-starting and towingInformation



Transporting the vehicle

InformationThe vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

CAUTIONThe vehicle can be damaged when tow‐

ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There isrisk of property damage. The vehicle shouldonly be transported on a loading platform.◀

Tow truck

The vehicle should only be transported on aloading platform.

CAUTIONWhen lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting

or body and chassis parts; damage can occuron vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐sitioning the vehicle.

Pushing vehicleTo remove a disabled vehicle from the dangerarea, it can be pushed for a short distance.The vehicle can only be pushed in selectorlever position N.In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐ceed as follows:

1. Switch on drive readiness, refer topage 72.

2. Depress brake pedal.3. Engage selector lever position N.

Seite 254



If there are electrical malfunctions, it may hap‐pen that you can't change the selector leverposition.Electronically unlock the transmission lock ifneeded, refer to page 88.

Towing other vehicles

InformationWARNINGIf the approved gross vehicle weight of

the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle tobe towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it willnot be possible to control the vehicle's re‐sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make surethat the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀

CAUTIONIf the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐

correctly, damage to other vehicle parts canoccur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the towfitting.◀

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐pending on local regulations.

▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearlyidentify the vehicle being towed by placinga sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐dow.

Tow barThe tow fittings used should be on the sameside on both vehicles.Should it prove impossible to avoid mountingthe tow bar at an offset angle, please observethe following:▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is secured with an offset.

Tow ropeWhen starting to tow the vehicle, make surethat the tow rope is taut.To avoid jerking and the associated stresseson the vehicle components when towing, al‐ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the frontor rear of the vehicle.The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,refer to page 245, are together in the cargoarea.

InformationCAUTIONIf the tow fitting is not used as intended,

there can be damage to the vehicle or to thetow fitting. There is risk of property damage.Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀

Use of the tow fitting:▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the

vehicle and screw it all the way in.▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for

positioning the vehicle.

Seite 255



▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, forexample, do not lift the vehicle by the towfitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Press on the mark of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmissionDo not tow-start the vehicle.Tow-starting the engine is not possible due tothe transmission.Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

What to do after an accidentInformation

WARNINGContact with live components can lead to

an electric shock. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. After an accident, do not touchany high-voltage components such as orangecolored high-voltage cables or parts that are incontact with exposed high-voltage cables.◀

WARNINGFluids in the high-voltage battery are cor‐

rosive. There is risk of injuries. Do not touchfluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.◀

General informationAfter an accident, compliance with the follow‐ing additional safety precautions is requiredwith regard to the high-voltage system:▷ Secure the crash site.▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or

firefighters of the fact that your vehicle isequipped with a high-voltage system.

▷ Engage selector lever position P, apply theparking brake, and switch off the ignition ordeactivate drive readiness.

▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the

high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain asafe distance from the vehicle.

Seite 256



CareVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due tothe selected options or country versions. Thisalso applies to safety-related functions andsystems. The respectively applicable countryprovisions must be observed when using therespective features and systems.

Car washesGeneral informationRegularly remove foreign objects such asleaves in the area below the windshield whenthe hood is raised.Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly inwinter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐age the vehicle.

Steam blaster and high-pressurewasher

InformationCAUTIONWhen cleaning with high-pressure wash‐

ers, components can be damaged due to thepressure or temperatures being too high.There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐tinuously. Follow the Owner's Manual for thehigh-pressure washer.◀

Distances and temperature▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,

seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:31.5 inches/80 cm.

Automatic car washes

InformationCAUTIONImproper use of automatic car washes

can cause damage to the vehicle. There is riskof property damage. Information the followinginstructions:▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

those that use soft brushes in order toavoid paint damage.

▷ Before driving into the car wash, make surethat the vehicle is not too large.

▷ Avoid car washes with guide rails higherthan 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to thechassis.

▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail toavoid damage to tires and rims.

▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage tothe exterior mirrors.

▷ Deactivate rain sensor if necessary to avoiddamage to the wiper system.◀

In some cases, an unintentional alarm can betriggered by the interior motion sensor of thealarm system. Follow the instructions onavoiding an unintentional alarm, refer topage 51.If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐tion on obstacle detection, for example in carwashes, to reduce PDC false alarms, refer topage 160.

Seite 257

Care Mobility


Before driving into a car washIn order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in acar wash, take the following steps:

1. Drive into the car wash.2. Engage selector lever position N.3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to

page 80.4. Release the parking brake.5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switchedon, and a Check-Control message is dis‐played.

CAUTIONSelector lever position P is automati‐

cally engaged when the ignition isswitched off. There is risk of property dam‐age. Do not switch ignition off in carwashes.◀

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outsidewhen in selector lever position N. A signalsounds when an attempt is made to lock thevehicle.For activation of drive readiness:

1. Depress the brake pedal.2. Press the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ping on the brake turns the ignition off.

Selector lever positionSelector lever position P is engaged automati‐cally:▷ When the ignition is switched off.▷ After approx. 15 minutes.

Headlights▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or

acidic cleansers.▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,

from insects, with shampoo and wash offwith water.

▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use anice scraper.

After washing the vehicleAfter washing the vehicle, apply the brakesbriefly to dry them; otherwise, braking actioncan be reduced and corrosion of the brakediscs can occur.Completely remove all residues on the win‐dows, to minimize loss of visibility due tosmearing and to reduce wiper noises andwiper blade wear.

Vehicle careCar care productsBMW recommends using car care and clean‐ing products from BMW.

WARNINGCleansers can contain substances that

are dangerous and harmful to your health.There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐terior, open the doors or windows. Only useproducts intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐low the instructions on the container.◀

Vehicle paintRegular care contributes to driving safety andvalue retention. Environmental influences inareas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐quency and extent of your car care to theseinfluences.Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐tered or discolored.

Leather careRemove dust from the leather often, using acloth or vacuum cleaner.

Seite 258

Mobility Care


Otherwise, particles of dust and road grimechafe in pores and folds, and lead to increasedwear and premature degradation of the leathersurface.To guard against discoloration, such as fromclothing, clean leather and provide leather careroughly every two months.Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐cause soiling on such surfaces is substantiallymore visible.Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt andgrease will gradually break down the protectivelayer of the leather surface.Suitable care products are available from adealer’s service center or another qualifiedservice center or repair shop.

Upholstery material careVacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.If upholstery is very dirty, for example, withbeverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.Clean the upholstery down to the seams usinglarge sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing thematerial vigorously.

CAUTIONOpen Velcro® fasteners on articles of

clothing can damage the seat covers. There isrisk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐cro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheelsWhen cleaning the vehicle, use only neutralwheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steamjets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐turer's instructions.Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agentscan destroy the protective layer of adjacentcomponents, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfacesCarefully clean components such as the radia‐tor grille or door handles with an ample supplyof water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ularly when they have been exposed to roadsalt.

Aluminum running boardsFlash rust on the aluminum running boards canbe removed with a special cleaning agent.

Rubber componentsEnvironmental influences can cause surfacesoiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Forcleaning, use only water and suitable careproducts, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐ommends original BMW care products.Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubbercare agents at regular intervals. When cleaningrubber seals, do not use any silicon-containingcar care products in order to avoid damage ornoises.

Fine wood partsClean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with asoft cloth.

Plastic componentsThese include:▷ Imitation leather surfaces.▷ Roofliner.▷ Lamp lenses.▷ Instrument cluster cover.▷ Matt black spray-coated components.▷ Painted parts in the interior.Clean with a microfiber cloth.Dampen cloth lightly with water.Do not soak the roofliner.

Seite 259

Care Mobility


CAUTIONCleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐

vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-dutygrease removers, fuel, or such, can damageplastic parts. There is risk of property damage.Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen clothlightly with water.◀

Safety beltsDirty belt straps impede the reeling action andthus have a negative impact on safety.

WARNINGChemical cleansers can destroy the

safety belt webbing. Missing protective effectof the safety belts. There is risk of injuries ordanger to life. Use only a mild soapy solutionfor cleaning the safety belts.◀

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safetybelts clipped into their buckles.Do not allow the switchs to retract the safetybelts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor matsWARNINGObjects in the driver's floor area can limit

the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.There is risk of an accident. Stow objects inthe vehicle such that they are secured andcannot enter into the driver's floor area. Usefloor mats that are suitable for the vehicle andcan be safely attached to the floor. Do not useloose floor mats and do not layer several floormats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor matsare securely fastened again after they were re‐moved, for example for cleaning.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐rior for cleaning.If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with amicrofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back andforth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lensesTo clean sensors and camera lenses, use acloth moistened with a small amount of glassdetergent.

Displays/Screens/protective glass ofthe Head-up Display

CAUTIONChemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of

any kind can damage the surface of displaysand screens. There is risk of property damage.Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀

CAUTIONThe surface of displays can be damaged

with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too highand do not use any scratching materials.◀

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐play using a microfiber cloth and commerciallyavailable dish-washing soap.

Long idle times and long-term vehiclestorage

CAUTIONThe high-voltage battery can be dam‐

aged by excessive discharge. There is risk ofproperty damage. Before storing the vehiclefor an extended period, ensure that the high-voltage battery is fully charged. During the idleperiod, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐tion at a compatible charging location. If nec‐essary, the high-voltage battery will becharged automatically. Make sure that thecharging process takes place. Regularly checkthe charging state.Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longerthan three months with a charging state belowapprox. 50 %.◀

For idle phases that last several weeks, parkthe vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐ble.

Seite 260

Mobility Care


Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 daysif the electric range is exhausted.With storage times of up to three months, ifpossible plug the vehicle into a compatiblepower source or park it in a nearly fully chargedstate.

InformationYour dealer's service center or another quali‐fied service center or repair shop can adviseyou on what to consider when storing the vehi‐cle for longer than three months.Follow the instructions for discharging thehigh-voltage battery, refer to page 197.

Seite 261

Care Mobility



ReferenceThis chapter contains the technical data and an

index that will quickly take you to the informationyou need.


Technical dataVehicle features and optionsThis chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with theseries. It also describes features that are notnecessarily available in your car, e. g., due to


InformationThe technical data and specifications in thisOwner's Manual are used as guidance values.The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, country version or country-specificmeasurement method. Detailed values can befound in the approval documents, on labels on

the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’sservice center or another qualified service cen‐ter or repair shop.The information in the vehicle documents al‐ways has priority over the information in thisOwner's Manual.

DimensionsThe dimensions can vary depending on themodel version, equipment or country-specificmeasurement method.The specified heights do not take into accountattached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,for example, due to the selected special equip‐ment, tires, load and chassis version.

BMW X5

Width with mirrors inches/mm 86/2,184

Width without mirrors inches/mm 76.3/1,938

Height inches/mm 69.4/1,762

Length inches/mm 193.2/4,908

Wheelbase inches/mm 115.5/2,933

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.7/12.7

Seite 264

Reference Technical data


Weights

X5 xDrive40e

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,570/2,980

Load lbs/kg 1,170/531

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,750/1,247

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,870/1,755

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft 34.2-72.5

Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.6-60.7/500-1,720

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 22.4/85.0 Fuel quality, refer topage 221

Seite 265

Technical data Reference


AppendixAny updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐hicle are listed here.

Updates made after theeditorial deadlineThese chapters of the printed Owner's Manualwere updated after the editorial deadline.▷ The right place for children: children al‐

ways in the rear, refer to page 67.

Seite 266

Reference Appendix


Seite 267

Appendix Reference


Everything from A to ZIndexAABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 144 ACC, Active Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 151 Accessories and parts 8 Acoustic pedestrian protec‐

tion 77 AC quick charging cable, see

Level 2 charging cable 212 Activated-charcoal filter 176 Activate drive readiness 73 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

tion 140 Active Cruise Control with

Stop & Go, ACC 151 Active Protection 142 Active seat ventilation,

front 58 Adapting to the course of the

road, hybrid system 94 Adaptive brake assistant 144 Adaptive brake lights, see

Brake force display 142 Adaptive Light Control 112 Additives, oil 239 Adjustments, seats/head re‐

straints 56 Advance climate control, refer

to Stationary climate con‐trol 178

After washing vehicle 258 Airbags 115 Airbags, indicator/warning

light 116 Air circulation, see Recircu‐

lated-air mode 175 Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐

ing function 174 Air distribution, manual 175

Air flow, automatic climatecontrol 175

Air outlets, see Ventila‐tion 176

Air pressure, tires 223 Alarm system 50 Alarm, unintentional 51 All around the center con‐

sole 16 All around the roofliner 17 All around the steering

wheel 14 All-season tires, see Winter

tires 228 All-wheel-drive 146 Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 181 Alternative oil types 239 Ambient light 114 Animal detection, see Night

Vision 134 Antifreeze, washer fluid 85 Antilock Brake System,

ABS 144 Anti-slip control, see

DSC 144 App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6 Approved axle load 265 Arrival time 105 Artificial engine noise 77 Ashtray 182 Ashtray, front 182 Ashtray, rear 183 Assistance for the combus‐

tion engine, eASSIST 78 Assistance for the combus‐

tion engine, eBOOST 78 Assistance when driving

off 144 Assist system, see Intelligent

Safety 124

Attentiveness assistant 142 AUTO H button 79 AUTO H button, see Auto‐

matic Hold 79 AUTO intensity 175 Automatic car wash 257 Automatic climate con‐

trol 173 Automatic Cruise Control

with Stop & Go 151 Automatic Curb Monitor 64 Automatic deactivation,

Front-seat passenger air‐bags 117

Automatic deactivation of thehybrid system 35

Automatic headlight con‐trol 111

Automatic Hold 79 Automatic locking 49 Automatic recirculated-air

control 175 Automatic Soft Closing,

doors 45 Automatic tailgate 45 Automatic transmission, see

Steptronic transmission 86 AUTO program, automatic cli‐

mate control 174 AUTO program, intensity 175 Auto Start/Stop function 74 Average fuel consump‐

tion 104 Average speed 104 Axle loads, weights 265

BBackrest curvature, see Lum‐

bar support 57 Backrest, seats 56

Seite 268

Reference Everything from A to Z


Backrest, width 58 Backup charging 216 Bad road trips 199 Band-aids, see First-aid

kit 252 Battery replacement, vehicle

battery 249 Battery replacement, vehicle

remote control 39 Battery, vehicle 249 Being towed, see Tow-start‐

ing and towing 254 Belts, safety belts 59 Beverage holder, cup

holder 191 Blinds, sun protection 53 BMW Assist, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, En‐tertainment and Communi‐cation

BMW Driver’s Guide app 6 BMW eDRIVE 32 BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys‐

tem 243 Bottle holder, see Cup

holder 191 Brake assistant 144 Brake assistant, adaptive 144 Brake discs, break-in 196 Brake force display 142 Brake lights, adaptive 142 Brake lights, brake force dis‐

play 142 Brake pads, break-in 196 Braking, hints 198 Breakdown assistance 251 Break-in 196 Brightness of Control Dis‐

play 107 Bulb replacement 246 Bulb replacement, front 247 Bulb replacement, rear 249 Bulbs and lights 246 Button, RES 154

Button, Start/Stop 72 Bypassing, see Jump-start‐

ing 252

CCalifornia Proposition 65

Warning 8 Calling up mirror adjust‐

ment 50 Calling up seat adjust‐

ment 50 Calling up steering wheel ad‐

justment 50 Camera lenses, care 260 Camera, rearview cam‐

era 163 Camera, Side View 167 Camera, Top View 166 Can holder, see Cup

holder 191 Car battery 249 Car care products 258 Care, displays 260 Care, vehicle 258 Cargo 201 Cargo area 185 Cargo area, enlarging 186 Cargo area, storage compart‐

ments 192 Cargo cover 185 Cargo, securing 202 Cargo straps, securing

cargo 202 Car key, see Remote con‐

trol 38 Carpet, care 260 Car wash 257 Catalytic converter, see Hot

exhaust system 198 CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 243 CD/Multimedia, see Owner's


Center armrest 189 Center console 16 Central locking system 44 Central screen, see Control

Display 18 Changes, technical, see Own

Safety 7 Changing parts 245 Changing wheels 249 Changing wheels/tires 227 CHARGE, energy recov‐

ery 78 Charge indicator, high-volt‐

age battery 92 Charging battery, see Vehicle

charging 210 Charging cable storage 212 Charging screen 91 Charging, see Charging vehi‐

cle 210 Charging, see Vehicle charg‐

ing 210 Charging status, see display

of the charging status 214 Charging to save fuel 205 Charging vehicle 210 Charging vehicle, see Vehicle

charging 210 Chassis number, see vehicle

identification number 10 Check Control 94 Checking the engine oil level

electronically 237 Checking the oil level elec‐

tronically 237 Children, seating position 67 Children, transporting

safely 67 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 69 Child restraint system 67 Child restraint systems,

mounting 68 Child safety locks 70 Child seat, mounting 68 Child seats 67

Seite 269

Everything from A to Z Reference


Chrome parts, care 259 Cigarette lighter 183 Cleaning displays 260 Climate control 173 Clock 99 Closing/opening via door

lock 43 Closing/opening with remote

control 41 Clothes hooks 192 Coasting 77 Cockpit 14 Combination switch, see Turn

signals 82 Combination switch, see

Wiper system 82 Combustion engine, start‐

ing 74 Comfort Access 47 COMFORT program, Driving

Dynamics Control 149 Compartments in the

doors 189 Compass 105 Compressor 229 Condensation on win‐

dows 175 Condensation under the vehi‐

cle 199 Condition Based Service

CBS 243 Confirmation signal 49 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's


ConnectedDrive Services Connecting electrical devi‐

ces 184 Contact with water, hybrid

system 35 Container for washer fluid 85 Continued driving with a flat

tire 120, 123 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 106

Controller 19 Control systems, driving sta‐

bility 144 Convenient opening with the

remote control 42 Coolant 241 Coolant level 241 Coolant temperature 99 Cooling function 174 Cooling, maximum 174 Cooling system 241 Cornering light 112 Corrosion on brake discs 199 Cosmetic mirror 182 Courtesy lamps during un‐

locking 42 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐

cle locked 42 Cruise control 157 Cruise control, active with

Stop & Go 151 Cruise Control, refer to Active

Cruise Control 151 Cruising range 99 Cup holder 191 Current fuel consump‐

tion 100

DDamage, tires 227 Data, technical 264 Date 99 Daytime running lights 112 Deactivating drive readi‐

ness 74 Defrosting, see Windows, de‐

frosting 175 Dehumidifying, air 174 Deleting personal data 25 Deletion of personal data 25 Departure times, stationary

climate control 179 Destination distance 105 Digital clock 99 Dimensions 264

Dimmable exterior mirrors 65 Dimmable interior mirror 65 Direction indicator, see Turn

signals 82 Display, electronic, instru‐

ment cluster 90 Display in windshield 107 Display lighting, see Instru‐

ment lighting 114 Displays, cleaning 260 Displays, hybrid system 92 Disposal, coolant 242 Disposal, vehicle battery 250 Distance control, see

PDC 160 Distance to destination 105 Divided screen view, split

screen 24 Door lock 43 Door lock, see Remote con‐

trol 38 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐

ing 45 Downhill control 146 Drive mode 148 Drive-off assistant 144 Drive-off assistant, see

DSC 144 Drive readiness 72 Drive readiness in detail 73 Drive readuness, deacti‐

vate 74 Driving Dynamics Con‐

trol 148 Driving instructions, break-

in 196 Driving instructions, hybrid

system 196 Driving notes, general 198 Driving on bad roads 199 Driving stability control sys‐

tems 144 Driving tips 198 Driving with combustion en‐

gine, POWER 77

Seite 270



DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐trol 144

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐trol 145

Dynamic Stability ControlDSC 144

Dynamic Traction ControlDTC 145

EeASSIST, assistance for the

combustion engine 78 eBOOST, assistance for the

combustion engine 78 ECO PRO 205 ECO PRO display 205 ECO PRO driving mode 205 ECO PRO mode 205 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐

struction 207 eDRIVE button 76 eDRIVE, system 32 EfficientDynamics 207 Electric drive readiness, Si‐

lent Start 74 Electric driving, ePOWER 75 Electric driving, MAX

eDRIVE 76 Electric driving, SAVE BAT‐

TERY 76 Electronic displays, instru‐

ment cluster 90 Electronic oil measure‐

ment 237 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, see DSC 144 Emergency charging, see

Backup charging 216 Emergency detection, remote

control 39 Emergency release, fuel filler

flap 219 Emergency release, parking

brake 81 Emergency Request 251

Emergency start function, en‐gine start 39

Emergency unlocking, trans‐mission lock 88

Energy recovery,CHARGE 78

Engine, automatic stop 74 Engine compartment 234 Engine compartment, work‐

ing in 234 Engine coolant 241 Engine noise, artificial 77 Engine oil 237 Engine oil, adding 238 Engine oil additives 239 Engine oil change 239 Engine oil filler neck 238 Engine oil temperature 98 Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 239 Engine oil types, suitable 239 Engine start during malfunc‐

tion 39 Engine start, jump-start‐

ing 252 Engine temperature 98 Entering a car wash 257 ePOWER, electric driving 75 Equipment, interior 180 Error displays, see Check

Control 94 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, see DSC 144 Exchanging wheels/tires 227 Exhaust system 198 Exterior mirror, automatic

dimming feature 65 Exterior mirrors 64 External start 252 External temperature dis‐

play 99 External temperature warn‐

ing 99 Eyes for securing cargo 202

FFailure message, see Check

Control 94 False alarm, see Unintentional

alarm 51 Fan, see Air flow 175 Filler neck for engine oil 238 Fine wood, care 259 First-aid kit 252 Flat tire, changing

wheels 249 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 122 Flat tire, repairing 229 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 118 Flat tire, warning

lamp 119, 123 Flooding 198 Floor carpet, care 260 Floor mats, care 260 Folding back rear seat back‐

rests 186 Fold-out position, wiper 84 Foot brake 198 Front airbags 115 Front center armrest 189 Front cup holder 191 Front-end collision warning

with braking function 128 Front-end collision warning

with City Braking func‐tion 125

Front fog lamps, , LED, bulbreplacement 249

Front fog lights 113 Front fog lights/cornering

lights, bulb replace‐ment 248

Front lights 247 Front-seat passenger airbags,

automatic deactivation 117 Front-seat passenger airbags,

indicator lamp 117 Front seats 56 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 122

Seite 271



Fuel 221 Fuel cap 218 Fuel consumption, see Aver‐

age fuel consumption 104 Fuel filler flap 218 Fuel gauge 98 Fuel quality 221 Fuel recommendation 221 Fuel, tank capacity 265 Functions, hybrid system 32 Fuse 250

GGarage door opener, see Uni‐

versal Integrated RemoteControl 180

Gasoline 221 Gear change, Steptronic

transmission 86 Gear shift indicator 101 General driving notes 198 Glare shield 182 Glasses compartment 190 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐

amic glass sunroof 53 Glove compartment 188 GPS location, vehicle posi‐

tion 107 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐

proved 265

HHandbrake, see Parking

brake 78 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 181 Hazard warning flashers 251 HDC Hill Descent Con‐

trol 146 Head airbags 115 Headlight control, auto‐

matic 111 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 111

Headlight flasher 82 Headlight glass 247 Headlights 247 Headlights, care 258 Head restraints 56 Head restraints, front 61 Head restraints, rear 62 Head-up Display 107 Head-up Display, care 260 Heavy cargo, stowing 202 High-beam Assistant 113 High beams 82 High beams/low beams, see

High-beam Assistant 113 High-voltage battery, charge

indicator 92 High-voltage battery, dis‐

charge 197 High-voltage system,

safety 35 Hill Descent Control

HDC 146 Hills 199 Hill start assistant, see Drive-

off assistant 144 Holder for beverages 191 Homepage 6 Hood 234 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 198 HUD Head-up Display 107 Hybrid system, adapting to

the course of the road 94 Hybrid system, at a glance 32 Hybrid system, automatic de‐

activation 35 Hybrid system, contact with

water 35 Hybrid system, displays 92 Hydroplaning 198

IIce warning, see External

temperature warning 99

Icy roads, see External tem‐perature warning 99

Identification marks, tires 225 Identification number, see ve‐

hicle identification num‐ber 10

iDrive 18 Ignition key, see Remote con‐

trol 38 Ignition off 72 Ignition on 72 Indication of a flat

tire 119, 123 Indicator and alarm lamps,

see Check Control 94 Indicator lamp, see Check

Control 94 Individual air distribution 175 Individual settings, see Per‐

sonal Profile 39 Inflation pressure, tires 223 Inflation pressure warning

FTM, tires 122 Info display, see On-Board

computer 103 Information 6 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 119 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 122 Instrument cluster 90 Instrument cluster, electronic

displays 90 Instrument lighting 114 Integrated key 38 Integrated Owner's Manual in

the vehicle 30 Intelligent emergency

call 251 Intelligent Safety 124 Intensity, AUTO pro‐

gram 175 Interior equipment 180 Interior lights 114 Interior lights during unlock‐

ing 42

Seite 272



Interior lights with the vehiclelocked 42

Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ming feature 65

Interior motion sensor 51 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐

quirements 101 Interval mode 83

JJacking points for the vehicle

jack 249 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 86 Jump-starting 252 Jump starting, see Backup

charging 216

KKey/remote control 38 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐

cess 47 Key Memory, see Personal

Profile 39 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 86 Knee airbag 116

LLabel on recommended

tires 228 Lamp in the exterior mirror,

see Active Blind Spot De‐tection 140

Lamp replacement 246 Lamp replacement, front 247 Lamp replacement, rear 249 Lane departure warning 138 Lane margin, warning 138 Language on Control Dis‐

play 107

Lashing eyes, securingcargo 202

LATCH child restraint fixingsystem 69

Leather, care 258 LED headlights, bulb replace‐

ment 247 LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 246 Letters and numbers, enter‐

ing 25 Level 1 Charging 215 Level 1 charging cable 212 Level 2 charging cable 212 Light 110 Light-alloy wheels, care 259 Light control 112 Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 246 Lighting 110 Lights and bulbs 246 Light switch 110 Load 202 Loading 201 Lock, door 43 Locking/unlocking via door

lock 43 Locking/unlocking with re‐

mote control 41 Locking, automatic 49 Locking, settings 49 Lock, power window 53 Locks, doors, and win‐

dows 70 Longer idle phases 260 Long idle times and long-term

vehicle storage 260 Long-term vehicle stor‐

age 260 Low beams 110 Low beams, automatic, see

High-beam Assistant 113 Lower back support 57 Lower tailgate 47 Luggage rack, see Roof-

mounted luggage rack 203

Lumbar support 57

MMaintaining charging state,

SAVE BATTERY 76 Maintenance 243 Maintenance require‐

ments 243 Maintenance, service require‐

ments 101 Maintenance system,

BMW 243 Make-up mirror 182 Malfunction displays, see

Check Control 94 Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐

pension 148 Manual air distribution 175 Manual air flow 175 Manual brake, see Parking

brake 78 Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 87 Manual operation, door

lock 43 Manual operation, exterior

mirrors 64 Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 219 Manual operation, Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 161 Manual operation, parking

brake 81 Manual operation, rearview

camera 163 Manual operation, Top

View 166 Marking, run-flat tires 229 Master key, see Remote con‐

trol 38 MAX eDRIVE, electric driv‐

ing 76 Maximum cooling 174 Maximum speed, display 102

Seite 273



Maximum speed, wintertires 228

Measurement, units of 107 Medical kit 252 Memory for seat, mirrors,

steering wheel 63 Menu, EfficientDynamics 207 Menu in instrument clus‐

ter 103 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐

ing concept 20 Messages, see Check Con‐

trol 94 Microfilter 176 Minimum tread, tires 227 Mirror 64 Mirror memory 63 Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 198 Mobility System 229 Modifications, technical, see

Own Safety 7 Moisture in headlight 247 Monitor, see Control Dis‐

play 18 Mounting of child restraint

systems 68 Moving sun visor 182 Multifunction steering wheel,

buttons 14

NNavigation, see Owner's


Neck restraints, front, seeHead restraints 61

Neck restraints, rear, seeHead restraints 62

Neutral cleaner, see wheelcleaner 259

New wheels and tires 227 Night Vision 134

Night Vision device, see NightVision 134

OOBD Onboard Diagnosis 244 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐

agnosis 244 Object detection, see Night

Vision 134 Obstacle marking, rearview

camera 164 Octane rating, see Recom‐

mended fuel grade 221 Odometer 99 Office, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Officially use hybrid sys‐tem 196

Offroad trips 199 Oil 237 Oil, adding 238 Oil additives 239 Oil change 239 Oil change interval, service

requirements 101 Oil filler neck 238 Oil types, alternative 239 Oil types, suitable 239 Old batteries, disposal 250 Onboard computer 103 Onboard computer, see On‐

board computer 103 Onboard monitor, see Control

Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 245 Opening/closing via door

lock 43 Opening and closing 38 Opening and closing, without

remote control 43 Opening and closing, with re‐

mote control 41 Operating concept, iDrive 18

Optional equipment, standardequipment 7

Outside air, see Automatic re‐circulated-air control 175

Overheating of engine, seeCoolant temperature 99

Own Safety 7

PPaint, vehicle 258 Panoramic glass sunroof 53 Parallel parking assistant 169 Park Distance Control

PDC 160 Parked car ventilation, refer to

Stationary climate con‐trol 178

Parked vehicle, condensa‐tion 199

Parking aid, see PDC 160 Parking assistant 169 Parking brake 78 Parking lights 110 Parking with Automatic

Hold 79 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger side mirror, tilting

downward 64 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐

era 164 PDC Park Distance Con‐

trol 160 Pedestrian detection, see

Night Vision 134 Pedestrian protection 77 Personal Profile 39 Personal Profile, exporting

profiles 41 Person warning with City light

braking function 131 Pinch protection system,

glass sunroof 54 Pinch protection system, win‐

dows 52 Plastic, care 259

Seite 274



POWER, driving with com‐bustion engine 77

Power failure 250 Power windows 51 Prescribed engine oil

types 239 Pressure, tire air pres‐

sure 223 Pressure warning FTM,

tires 122 Profile, see Personal Pro‐

file 39 Programmable memory but‐

tons, iDrive 24 Protective function, glass

sunroof 54 Protective function, win‐

dows 52 Push-and-turn switch, see

Controller 19

QQuick charging cable, see

Level 2 charging cable 212

RRadiator fluid 241 Radio-operated key, see Re‐

mote control 38 Radio ready state 72 Radio, see Owner's Manual

for Navigation, Entertain‐ment and Communication

Rain sensor 83 Rear automatic climate con‐

trol 177 Rear center armrest 190 Rear drink holder 191 Rear lights 249 Rear seats 59 Rearview camera 162 Rearview mirror 64 Rear window defroster 176 Recirculated-air mode 175

Recommended fuelgrade 221

Recommended tirebrands 228

Refueling 218 Regular charging 205 Remaining range 99 Remote control/key 38 Remote control, malfunc‐

tion 43 Remote control, univer‐

sal 180 Replacement fuse 250 Replacing parts 245 Replacing wheels/tires 227 Reporting safety malfunc‐

tions 10 RES button 154 RES button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 151 RES button, see Cruise con‐

trol 157 Reserve warning, see

Range 99 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 119 Retaining straps, securing

cargo 202 Retreaded tires 228 Roadside parking lights 111 Roller sunblinds 53 RON recommended fuel

grade 221 Roofliner 17 Roof load capacity 265 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 203 RSC Run Flat System Com‐

ponent, see Run-flattires 229

Rubber components,care 259

Run-flat tires 229

SSafe braking 198 Safety belt reminder for driv‐

er's seat and front passen‐ger seat 60

Safety belts 59 Safety belts, care 260 Safety of the high-voltage

system 35 Safety Package, see Active

Protection 142 Safety switch, windows 53 Safety systems, airbags 115 SAVE BATTERY, electric

driving 76 Saving fuel 204 Screen, see Control Dis‐

play 18 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐

hicle tool kit 245 Sealant 229 Seat belts, see Safety

belts 59 Seat heating, front 58 Seat heating, rear 59 Seating position for chil‐

dren 67 Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory 63 Seats 56 Seats, front 56 Seats, rear 59 Seat ventilation, front 58 Selection list in instrument

cluster 103 Selector lever, Steptronic

transmission 86 Self-leveling suspension, air

suspension 147 Self-leveling suspension,

malfunction 148 Sensors, care 260 Service and warranty 8

Seite 275



Service requirements, Condi‐tion Based ServiceCBS 243

Service requirements, dis‐play 101

Services, ConnectedDrive SET button, see Active

Cruise Control, ACC 151 SET button, see Cruise con‐

trol 157 Settings, locking/unlock‐

ing 49 Settings on Control Dis‐

play 106 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐

rors, steering wheel 63 Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 88 Shoulder support 58 Side airbags 115 Side View 167 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 49 Silent Start, electric drive

readiness 74 Sitting safely 56 Size 264 Slide/tilt glass roof 53 Smoker's package 182 Snow chains 232 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐

nostics 244 Sockets, see Connecting

electrical devices 184 SOS button 251 Spare fuse 250 Speed, average 104 Speed limit detection, on‐

board computer 105 Speed limiter, display 102 Speed Limit Information 102 Speed warning 105 Split screen 24 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic

Driving Control 149

Sport displays, torque dis‐play, performance dis‐play 105

SPORT program, driving dy‐namics 149

Sport program, transmis‐sion 87

Stability control systems 144 Standard charging cable, see

Level 1 charging cable 212 Standard charging, see Level

1 Charging 215 Start/Stop button 72 Start function during malfunc‐

tion 39 Starting the combustion en‐

gine 74 Stationary climate con‐

trol 178 Status control display,

tires 119 Status information, iDrive 23 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Steering wheel, adjusting 65 Steering wheel heating 66 Steering wheel memory 63 Steptronic transmission 86 Storage compartment on the

center console 189 Storage compartments 188 Storage compartments, loca‐

tions 188 Storage, tires 229 Storing the charging cable,

see Storage 212 Storing the vehicle 260 Suitable engine oil types 239 Summer tires, tread 227 Sun visor 182 Supplementary text mes‐

sage 97 Surround View 162 Suspension settings 148 Switch for Dynamic Driving

Control 148 Switch, see Cockpit 14

Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 23 SYNC program, automatic cli‐

mate control 175

TTachometer 98 Tailgate, automatic 45 Tailgate via remote con‐

trol 42 Tail lamps 249 Tank unlocking, see Tank

vent 218 Tank vent 218 Technical changes, see Own

Safety 7 Technical data 264 Telephone, see Owner's


Temperature, automatic cli‐mate control 174

Temperature display for ex‐ternal temperature 99

Temperature, engine oil 98 Terminal, starting aid 253 Text message, supplemen‐

tary 97 Theft alarm system, see

Alarm system 50 Thermal camera, see Night

Vision 134 Thigh support 57 Tilt alarm sensor 51 Time of arrival 105 Tire damage 227 Tire identification marks 225 Tire inflation pressure 223 Tire inflation pressure moni‐

tor, see FTM 122 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 118 Tires, changing 227 Tire sealant 229

Seite 276



Tires, everything on wheelsand tires 223

Tires, run-flat tires 229 Tire tread 227 Tone, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainmentand Communication

Tool 245 Top View 165 Total vehicle weight 265 Touchpad 21 Towing 254 Tow-starting 254 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 118 Traction control 145 TRACTION, driving dynam‐

ics 145 TRACTION program, Dy‐

namic Driving Control 149 Transmission lock, electronic

unlocking 88 Transmission, see Steptronic

transmission 86 Transporting children

safely 67 Tread, tires 227 Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 82 Trip odometer 99 Trip onboard computer 105 Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐

eter 99 Turning circle lines, rearview

camera 164 Turn signals, operation 82

UUnintentional alarm 51 Units of measurement 107 Universal remote control 180 Unlock button, Steptronic

transmission 87 Unlocking/locking via door

lock 43

Unlocking/locking with re‐mote control 41

Unlocking, settings 49 Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐

try trips 199 Updates made after the edito‐

rial deadline 7 Upholstery care 259 USB interface 185

VVanity mirror 182 Vehicle battery 249 Vehicle battery, replac‐

ing 249 Vehicle, break-in 196 Vehicle care 258 Vehicle features and op‐

tions 7 Vehicle identification num‐

ber 10 Vehicle jack 249 Vehicle paint 258 Vehicle position, GPS loca‐

tion 107 Vehicle wash 257 Ventilation 176 Venting, refer to Stationary

climate control 178 Venting, see Ventilation 176 Vent, see Ventilation 176 Vertical Dynamic Control 147 VIN, see vehicle identification

number 10 Voice activation system 27

WWarning and indicator lamps,

see Check Control 94 Warning displays, see Check

Control 94 Warning lamp in the exterior

mirror, see Active Blind SpotDetection 140

Warning messages, seeCheck Control 94

Warning triangle 252 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 85 Washer nozzles, wind‐

shield 84 Washer system 82 Washing, vehicle 257 Water, hybrid system 35 Water on roads 198 Weights 265 Welcome lamps during un‐

locking 42 Welcome lights 111 What to do after an acci‐

dent 256 Wheel cleaner 259 Wheels, changing 227 Wheels, everything on wheels

and tires 223 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 122 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 118 Window defroster, rear 176 Windows, powered 51 Windshield washer fluid 85 Windshield washer noz‐

zles 84 Windshield washer sys‐

tem 82 Windshield washer system,

see Washer/wiper sys‐tem 82

Windshield wiper 82 Winter storage, care 260 Winter tires, suitable

tires 228 Winter tires, tread 227 Wiper 82 Wiper blades, replacing 245 Wiper fluid 85 Wiper, fold-out position 84 Wiper system 82 Wood, care 259

Seite 277



Word match concept, naviga‐tion 25

Working on the hybrid sys‐tem 35

Wrench, see Onboard vehicletool kit 245

XxDrive 146 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐

placement 247

Seite 278



More about BMW

bmwusa.comThe Ultimate

Driving Machine®

01 4

0 2

966

021

ue

*BL296602100Q*


Documents

THE BMW X5 WITH eDRIVE